JP2015116353A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game by executing display in various modes.SOLUTION: In the case where a change animation of a class number 5 is displayed in which an old handyman 813 appears, the number of icons with a changed display mode is 1. In the case where a change animation of the class number 5 is displayed in which Yoshimune 801 appears, the number of icons with a changed display mode is 2. The display mode for a part of the animation which belongs to the change animation of the class number 5 and in which the old handyman 813 appears is different from the display mode for a part of the animation which belongs to the change animation of the class number 5 and in which Yoshimune 801 appears.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Conventionally, there has been a game machine that displays icons related to symbol variation display.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the icon display tends to be monotonous, and there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to be interested in the game table.

  The objective of this invention is providing the game stand which can improve the interest of a game by displaying in various aspects.

The above purpose is
A first display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of icons;
A second display means capable of displaying at least the symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of animations,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a first animation,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a second animation,
The first display means is a display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the first animation is displayed;
The first display means is display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the second animation is displayed;
When the first animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the first number,
When the second animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the second number,
The display mode of at least a part of the first animation is a display mode that is at least different from the display mode of at least a part of the second animation,
The first number is at least different from the second number;
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by performing display in various modes.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process by the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(c) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. (D) is a figure which shows an example of the winning order look-ahead result memory | storage part with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the presentation control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure explaining the display aspect of the holding | maintenance icon and the fluctuation | variation icon of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the classification of the change animation of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1-1 of the effect of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1-2 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1-3 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1-4 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3-1 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3-2 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3-3 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3-4 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4-1 of the effect of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4-2 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4-3 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 5 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 6 of the production | presentation of the change animation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden or metal frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales office. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. To the button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can be set by a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), 233, and variable prize winning ports 234, 235 (open state) described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, the second special symbol starting port 233, and the variable winning port 234, the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the presence of the warp device 242 and the like. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the left path, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball falling on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208 e is fixed at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 3, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided (two in total), but the first special symbol and the second special symbol Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both special symbols may be provided. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. It is possible to hold the special figure 2 variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, 233, around the rendering device 206. , Variable winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In this embodiment, the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port 233 are arranged one below the center of the game board 200, and are divided into two branches of a substantially inverted Y-shaped game ball passage 231. One of the lower ends is the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the other lower end is the special figure 2 starting port 233. Each time a game ball that has entered from the upper end opening of the game ball passage 231 passes through the game ball passage 231, a special mechanism shown in FIG. 2 are alternately distributed to the start port 233. The distribution mechanism is a plate-like mechanism that operates in conjunction with the game ball passing through the game ball passage 231. In this embodiment, a transparent plastic game ball passage 231 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 233, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The balls that have entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port 233 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure 2 variable game is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting ports 232, 233), or wins no winning port or starting port, or only passes through the normal starting ports 228, 229 To reach the outlet 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball enters the game ball path 231 at the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in a vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball is won at the special figure 2 starting ports 232 and 233, the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting ports 232 and 233 at the timing. The value is latched, and the latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting ports 232 and 233.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. Special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the ball has entered the special figure 2 start openings 232 and 233 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows seven types of special charts, "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G", as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 5 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state shown in FIG. 11 (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start port 232, 233, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or 2 The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the starting ports 232 and 233. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before power interruption). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning ports 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 2 starting ports 232, 233, or the general start It is determined that there is a passage through the mouths 228 and 229. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 233, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 233, 228, 229 are won, the RAM 308 is provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the winning ball number storage area is read and 1 is added to set the original winning ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, 233, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, 229, and the variable winning port 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value pair (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1 start information) in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. Stores the same number as the number of holds. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, every time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the special figure 1 starting information with the highest holding order (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 starting information is stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 hold count increases by one, new special figure 1 start information is written in the hold order next to the special figure 1 start information having the lowest hold order (last).

  Corresponding to the special figure 2 start ports 232 and 233 of the random number generation circuit 318 when the special figure 2 start ports 232 and 233 are won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full. A special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing a predetermined process on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 is used. Random values are acquired and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value pair (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2 starting information) in the special figure 2 random value storage area are stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. Stores the same number as the number of holds. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, every time the special figure 2 holding number decreases, the special figure 2 starting information with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 starting information has a holding order of 1 It is processed so that it moves up one by one. Also, each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, new special figure 2 starting information is written in the holding order next to the special figure 2 starting information having the lowest holding order.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called start opening winning order variation game table that executes special figure varying games in the order in which game balls have won the special figure starting opening 230 or the special drawing 2 starting openings 232 and 233. Therefore, a special figure type information storage area in which special figure type information indicating whether the next special figure variable game to be executed is special figure 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game is stored in the order of winning is stored in the RAM 308. Is provided. In the special figure type information storage area, the special figure type information with the highest prize ranking is deleted each time the number of holds of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is decreased, and the winning ranking of the remaining special figure type information is also deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of holds in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is increased, new special figure type information is written in the next winning ranking of the special figure type information having the lowest winning ranking.

  In the game ball passage 231 shown in FIG. 3, the passing game balls are alternately distributed to the special figure 1 start port 230 and the special figure 2 start port 233 by the distribution mechanism. Therefore, as a rule, special figure type information “Special figure 1” indicating special figure 1 variable game and special figure type information “special figure 2” indicating special figure 2 variable game are won in the special figure type information storage area. Line up alternately. Thereby, the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are executed alternately. However, there may be a case in which a plurality of game balls do not enter the special figure 1 start port 230 and the special figure 2 start port 233 alternately but enter one start port. For example, when a game ball that has entered the game ball passage 231 wins the special figure 1 start opening 230 by the distribution mechanism, the distribution mechanism then enters the game ball that has entered the game ball passage 231 into the special figure 2 start opening 233. However, if the special figure 2 reservation number storage area at this time is full, the reservation number of special figure 2 does not increase. Accordingly, the new special figure type information is not written in the winning order next to the special figure type information “Special figure 1” having the lowest prize ranking in the special figure type information storage area. In this state, the distribution mechanism then causes the game balls that have entered the game ball passage 231 to enter the special figure 1 starting port 230. As a result, the new special figure type information “Special Figure 1” is written in the winning order next to the special figure type information “Special Figure 1” having the lowest prize ranking in the special figure type information storage area. For this reason, in the special figure type information storage area, the same special figure type information “special figure 1” is arranged in two adjacent winning ranks. When the reservation is advanced and the winning rank of the special figure type information “Special Figure 1” having the lowest winning rank is the first, the special figure 1 variable game is executed twice in succession.

  When special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information is newly acquired, special figure prefetching processing is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. There are as many pairs as the number of reserved custom maps stored in the reserved number storage area of the fixed number storage area. Stored. Within the general-purpose random number storage area, each time the number of general-purpose holds is decreased, the top-most (first) general-design start information is erased, and the remaining general-purpose start-information holding rank is 1 It is processed so that it moves up one by one. Also, each time the number of reserved maps increases by one, new map start information is written in the next hold order after the lowest order (last) map start information. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the common diagram A or B shown in FIG. 5D) and the off symbol (the common diagram C shown in FIG. 5D). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  On the other hand, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is started using the earliest usual figure starting information in the ordinary random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the normal start information from the first (most recently stored) hold position in the normal random number storage area, and the normal winning random number value in the acquired normal start information and Based on the value of the ordinary probability change flag in the RAM 308, etc., the winning / bad determination table (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b) described later) stored in the ROM 306 is used for winning or losing. (Decision of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 9C). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Subtract 1 from the number of reserved maps in the area At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special figure 1 stop table To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. First, for reference, the operation in the case of the special figure 2 priority change will be described, and then the start opening winning order change will be described. In the special figure 2 priority variation, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure related lottery process (special figure) for the special figure 1 is performed. 1-related lottery process) is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. It is executed by using the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. It is executed by using the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is one or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 starting information from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Then, based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the success / failure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 10A described later) (See (d)) is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1), or to make a mistake (whether or not). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 11 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the reserved figure number 2 in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. Also, as will be described later, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game or special figure 1 variable game, and special figure variable games related to holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are started in the order of winning at the start opening. The starting order winning order variation to be performed may be used. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  Next, the special drawing related lottery process in the case of operating with the start opening winning order variation will be described. In the case of starting port winning order variation, special drawing related lottery processing is performed in the order in which the game balls have won the special drawing starting port. The special figure related lottery processing does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and the special figure variable game that is held Is executed based on the earliest special figure type information in the special figure type information storage area. When the first special figure type information is “special figure 1”, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) described above is performed using the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 random value storage area. Executed. When the first special figure type information is “special figure 2”, the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) is performed using the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Executed. The main control unit 300 deletes the special figure type information with the highest winning rank from the special figure type information storage area every time the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 decreases by one, and the remaining special figure types A process of incrementing the information winning rank by one is executed. Further, the notification of the determination result of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and a prize is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting ports 232, 233. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is performed in the order of winning the special figure starting port.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, 233, variable winning port 234, 235 Includes information indicating whether or not a prize has been won. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 8B to 8C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 1 hold count stored in the special figure 1 hold count storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch count storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased when the special figure 1 hold number is larger than the special figure 1 prefetch number, and the special figure 1 hold number is equal to the special figure 1 prefetch number. Is determined that the starting information in FIG. 1 has not increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area This is performed by comparing the number of special figure 2 look-ahead stored in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that neither the start information of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 has increased, the special figure prefetching is performed. The process ends and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process. If it is determined in step S303 that the start information in FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S305, and if it is determined that the start information in FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309.

  In step S305, the increased special figure 1 start information is pre-read from the special figure 1 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 307 following step S 305, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S309, the increased special figure 2 start information is prefetched from the special figure 2 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S311 following step S309, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2, but whether or not the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is pre-read is determined. It may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the starting information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit, and the prefetching result May be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  8B to 8C illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart A” as stop symbol information. ”(15R special big hit) is stored,“ Special Figure G ”(out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ hold 3 ”, and stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area“ hold 4 ”. . In FIG. 8B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, “special drawing d” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage areas “hold 1” to “hold 3”, and the stop symbol is stored in the storage area “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 8C, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8 (d) shows the special figure 1 prefetch result stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit and the special figure 2 prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the order of winning prizes. An example of the state memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part is shown. The winning order prefetch result storage unit is provided in the RAM 308. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the winning order look-ahead result storage unit has the same number as the sum of the number of possible holdings (four) in FIG. 1 and the number of possible holdings (four) in FIG. Then, there are 8) storage areas “winning 1” to “winning 8”. Each storage area is associated with the winning order (winnings 1 to 8) of the special figure type information storage area. Each of the storage areas stores special figure type information ("Special Figure 1" or "Special Figure 2") and pre-read stop symbol information. In the example shown in FIG. 8D, the storage area “Win 1” stores information on the special figure type “Special Figure 1” and the stop symbol “Special Figure G” (out of line). The storage area “winning prize 2” stores information on the special figure type “special figure 2” and the stop symbol “special figure d” (out of line). In the storage area “Win 3”, information on the special figure type “Special Figure 1” and the stop symbol “Special Figure A” (15R special jackpot) is stored. The storage area “win 4” stores information on the special figure type “special figure 2” and the stop symbol “special figure d” (out of line). The storage area “win 5” stores information on the special figure type “special figure 1” and the stop symbol “special figure G” (out of line). The storage area “win 6” stores information on the special figure type “special figure 2” and the stop symbol “special figure d” (out of line). In the storage areas “win 7” and “win 8”, information on the special figure type and the stop symbol is not stored. In the winning order look-ahead result storage unit shown in FIG. 8D, the state in which the information on the special figure type and the stop symbol is not stored is described as “none”.

  The flowchart shown in FIG. 8A shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed by providing the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit and the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit (FIG. 8 ( b) to (c)), the prefetching result storage unit for special figure 1 and the prefetching result storage unit for special figure 2 are not provided, and only the winning order prefetching result storage unit shown in FIG. Processing may be executed. That is, a plurality of prefetch result storage units may not be provided, and the prefetch process may be executed by storing the prefetch results of FIGS. 1 and 2 in one prefetch result storage unit.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, it is possible to pre-determine the determination result, the variable timer number (variation time), etc. Information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal / failure determination table used when the probability of normalization at the time of determination of success / failure is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 9C shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal-game A and 50% for the normal-game B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the universal figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  Fig.11 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  Fig.12 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the case where the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special illustrations a and b are symbols in which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1 and has a longer open time of the attacker (or a larger R number). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process. First, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a prefetch notice execution condition is satisfied (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied when the prefetching result information command sent from the main control unit 300 is received. Note that even if a prefetch result information command is received, the prefetch notice may not be executed. For example, it may be added as a pre-reading notice execution condition that the lottery of the pre-reading notice performed according to the pre-read result is won. Further, it may be added as a pre-reading notice execution condition that the player has pressed the chance button 136 within the operation effective period.

If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the pre-reading notice execution condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S803 and sets execution of the pre-reading notice according to the prefetch result. In the setting of execution of the pre-reading notice according to the pre-reading result, for example, a setting related to a change animation used for production when changing the pre-reading notice display mode using the hold icon and the display mode of the change notice using the change icon is performed. Also, settings related to an icon change animation that actually changes the display mode of the change icon are also made. Note that the change animation and the icon change animation may not be executed. It should be noted that another animation (increase / move / decrease / erase) regarding the hold icon and the change icon may be performed during the execution of the change animation or the icon change animation. When a plurality of animations are executed for one icon and the execution periods of the plurality of animations overlap, both animations may be displayed, one animation is displayed with priority, and the other animation is displayed. The animation may be stopped or both animations may be stopped. Also, if another animation start condition is met while the animation is displayed, the previously displayed animation is displayed continuously, and the start of another animation is delayed until the end of the animation. Alternatively, the previously displayed animation may be stopped and another animation may be displayed, or a part of the previous or subsequent animation may be shortened and displayed.
In this embodiment, the change animation and the icon change animation are displayed at a timing when the hold icon does not move. That is, the display is started at a timing when the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not moved by the movement animation.
In addition, when the number of holds increases during the display of the change animation and the icon change animation, an increase animation for the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased along with the change animation or icon change animation being executed may be displayed.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the change animation type number to be executed based on the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. To do. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 confirms the number of holds from the prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command, and is specified by “minimum change number” and “maximum change number” in the change animation relating to the determined type number. It is determined whether or not the number of holds is within a range. When the number of reservations is within the range, the number of reservations whose icon display mode is changed is determined to be less than or equal to the number of reservations by a predetermined lottery process, etc., and the number of reservations exceeds the range The number of suspensions in which the icon display mode is changed is determined to be within the range by a predetermined lottery process or the like. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 identifies the number of suspensions in which the icon display mode is changed based on the prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command by a predetermined lottery process or the like.

  Next, in the setting related to the icon change animation, the first sub control unit 400 refers to a table showing the icon display mode in the pre-read notification shown in FIG. Determined by

  When the process of step S803 is completed, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S805 and executes a prefetch notice control process. In this case, the prefetch notice control process executes a process for performing control related to the start of the prefetch notice.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetch result information command has not been received in step S801, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S805 without proceeding to step S803, but without performing substantial prefetch notice control processing. The process proceeds to step S807.

  The first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S805 without continuing from step S801 to step S803 even when the prefetch notice is being executed, and continues the prefetch notice control process. The prefetch notice control process in this case is a control process related to the prefetch notice being executed. For example, a temporal process such as a process of updating the changed animation image for one frame is performed. In step S807 following step S805, other effect control processes other than the pre-reading notice are executed, and then the effect control process ends.

  FIG. 15A shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the other effect control process (step S807) shown in FIG. FIG. 15 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long-long opening effect process shown in FIG. 15A is a normal symbol variation start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag that restricts the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S901). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S901, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S901, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S903 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S903 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S905, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S905 that the stop pattern of the normal figure variable game is the normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S907, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S909, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and performs the main process effect control. The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S905 that the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is not the normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S911, selects the effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S909, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S903 that the result of determining whether or not the normal variable game is successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S915, and executes the electric long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S915 (step S917).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S917 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S919, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as the electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S909, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S917 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes other control processing for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 15, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 15B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 15B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric-chu long opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S1001 in FIG. 16A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S1001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S1003 following step S1001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1005. . In step S1005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S1007 following step S1005, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S1009 following step S1007, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S1007, a process such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, an effect data update process is performed.

  In step S1011 following step S1009, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S1013 following step S1011, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S1003.

  FIG. 16B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 16C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles. In step S1201 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S1003 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1203 following step S1201, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

Next, a display mode of the hold icon and the change icon (hereinafter, one or both may be collectively referred to as “icon”) of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a table showing a list of icon display modes. FIG. 17B is the name of the display mode of the icon shown in FIG. The table shown in FIG. 17A is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example. The table shown in FIG. 17A is used in a process (step S803) for setting execution of a prefetch notice according to a prefetch result of the first sub-control unit effect control process. The table shown in FIG. 17A includes items of “identification number”, “display mode”, “big hit reliability”, and “display frequency”. The “identification number” in the left column in the figure indicates a number for identifying the display mode of an icon image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “icon”). The “display mode” on the right side of the “identification number” in the figure shows a specific example of the display mode of the icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 17A and each of the figures described later, the display mode of the identification number 1 is a circular shape with white inside. The name of the display mode is referred to as “default”. Further, the display mode of the identification number 2 is a circle including the character “Phantom” inward. The name of the display mode is referred to as “precursor”. Further, the display mode of the identification number 3 is a circle with a rightward hatching applied inward. The name of the display mode is referred to as “blue”. Moreover, the display mode of the identification number 4 is a circular shape with vertical and horizontal hatching applied inward. The name of the display mode is referred to as “green”. Further, the display mode of the identification number 5 is a circular shape that is hatched inwardly to the right. The name of the display mode is referred to as “red”. Further, the display mode of the identification number 6 is a circle with a family crest pattern on the inside. The name of the display mode is referred to as “family crest”.
When the icon is displayed in the “prediction” display mode, the display mode of the icon may be changed before the suspended symbol variation display corresponding to the icon is started. In addition, if the icon is displayed in the “predictor” display mode, it is not always necessary to display the icon before the symbol variation display is started, compared to the case where the icon is displayed in the “default” display mode. The probability that the aspect changes may be set high. Further, in this example, when the display mode changes after the icon is displayed in the “precursor” display mode, it can be changed to all of the table in FIG. After the icon is displayed as “precursor”, the icon may be set not to be displayed in the “blue” display mode. The above-described contents are not limited to “precursors”, and the same applies to other display modes.

The “big hit reliability” on the right side of the “display mode” diagram indicates the possibility of a big hit for each display mode of the icon. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the “default” display mode of identification number 1 is set to be the lowest. As shown by the downward arrow in the table of FIG. 17, the big hit reliability is set to be higher as the identification number is larger, and the big hit reliability of the display mode of the “family crest” of the identification number 6 is the highest. Is set to The jackpot reliability may be 100% or lower than 100%. Conversely, a display mode with a big hit reliability of 0% may be provided. In addition to the big hit reliability, a status such as a so-called “Lever probability (a probability change is confirmed when the big hit is reached; whether or not the big hit is determined is not determined)” may be set for each display mode.
Further, in this embodiment, the “default” jackpot reliability with the highest display frequency is set to be the lowest. For example, the jackpot reliability is set even though the display frequency is lower than the “default”. You may provide the display mode whose reliability is lower than "default".
In the present embodiment, the icons 1 and 2 are displayed in common, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one icon may have a dedicated display.
Further, it may be set to display only when the generated big hit is a probable big hit while providing a display mode with the big hit reliability of 100%. Not only the occurrence of a probability change but also a display mode according to a change in the gaming state, a profit to the player, and the like may be provided. In particular, the display mode is not limited to what is advantageous to the player, and may be provided with a display mode corresponding to the disadvantage to the player.

  The “display frequency” on the right side of the “big hit reliability” diagram indicates the display frequency for each display mode. In the present embodiment, the display frequency of the display mode of the “family crest” with the identification number 6 is set to be the lowest. As indicated by the upward arrow in the table of FIG. 17, the display frequency is set so as to increase as the identification number decreases, and the display frequency of the “default” display mode of identification number 1 is set to be the highest. Has been.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the type of change animation of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a table showing a list of types of change animation. The table shown in FIG. 18 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example. The table shown in FIG. 18 is used in a process (step S803) for setting execution of a prefetch notice according to a prefetch result of the first sub-control unit effect control process.

  The change animation shown in FIG. 18 is an animation that is executed when the display mode of the pre-reading notice and the change notice is changed by an icon. The table shown in FIG. 18 includes “type number”, “display mode”, “minimum change number”, “maximum change number”, “execution probability”, “elevation reliability”, “average promotion at the time of mode change” from the left column. It consists of items “number” and “scale”.

  The “type number” in the left column in the figure indicates a number for classifying the change animation. In the present embodiment, the change animation is roughly divided into eight types of type numbers 1 to 8. The “display mode” on the right side of the “type number” in the figure indicates the display mode of the image of the change animation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “change animation”). “Minimum change number” on the right side of the “display mode” diagram indicates the minimum number of icons whose display mode is changed by executing the change animation. The “maximum change number” on the right side of the “minimum change number” in the figure indicates the maximum number of icons whose display mode is changed by executing the change animation. That is, when the change animation is executed, the display mode is changed with the number of icons within the range of “minimum change number” to “maximum change number”. The “execution probability” on the right side of the “maximum number of changes” diagram indicates the probability that each change animation will be executed. “Promotion reliability (%)” on the right side of the “execution probability” diagram indicates the reliability related to the promotion of the display mode of the icon when the change animation is executed. The “average promotion number at the time of mode change” on the right side of the “promotion reliability (%)” figure is the average number of promotions that are promoted when the icon display mode is changed (for example, “blue” to “family crest”). When the icon display mode is changed, the display mode of the icon is changed from “blue” to “green” and “red” to “family crest”, so the promotion number is 3.) Show. “Measure (msec)” on the right side of the “average number of promotions at the time of mode change” in the figure indicates the time required for executing the change animation.

  Next, the change animation of type number 1 will be described. In the change animation of type number 1, display mode A-1 is set. In the display mode A-1, a character image (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune”) 801 of a picture of Shogun Yoshimune that appears from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with a sword is displayed in the display area. This is a display mode in which the display mode of some icons can be changed by sequentially cutting all the icons displayed in the screen (hereinafter referred to as “success pattern” in some cases). The “minimum change number” is set to 0, and the “maximum change number” is set to 4. The “execution probability” will be described in detail later, including the “execution probability” of each change animation of type numbers 2 to 8. The “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 20%, and the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to 1.5. The “scale (msec)” is set to 5000 msec. It should be noted that the change animations of type number 1 are different change animations by changing the number of icons to be changed and the “scale” even if the display mode is the same A-1. The same applies to the change animations of type numbers 2 to 8. In the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability of the icon display mode can be promoted by executing the change animation is exemplified, but the display mode for demoting the jackpot reliability may be changed.

  Next, the change animation of type number 2 will be described. In the change animation of type number 2, the display mode A-1 is set similarly to the change animation of type number 1. The “minimum change number” is set to 0, and the “maximum change number” is set to 4. The “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 40%, and the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to 2.5. The “scale (msec)” is set to 5500 msec. In the present embodiment, the same display mode A-1 is set for the change animation of type number 2 and the change animation of type number 1, and “execution probability”, “elevation reliability (%)”, “mode change” are set. With regard to the “average number of promotions” and “scale”, different numbers or conditions are set for the change animation of type number 2 and the change animation of type number 1. However, the “execution probability”, “elevation reliability (%)” of the change animation of type number 2, “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” and “scale” are all “execution probability” of the change animation of type number 1 , “Elevation reliability (%)”, “average number of promotion at the time of mode change”, and “scale” may not be set differently. For example, the “scale” of the change animation of type number 2 may be set to 5000 msec similarly to the change animation of type number 1.

  Next, the change animation of type number 3 will be described. In the change animation of type number 3, display mode A-2 is set. The display mode A-2 is a display mode of all icons, although Yoshimune 801, which appears from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with a sword, sequentially cuts all displayed icons. Is a display mode that is not changed (hereinafter may be referred to as “failure pattern”). In the present embodiment, the display mode A-2 is a failure pattern in which the display mode of all icons is not changed, and therefore, “minimum change number” and “maximum change number” are both set to 0. The “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 0%, and the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to 0. The “scale (msec)” is set to 4800 msec. In the present embodiment, the scale of the display mode A-1 (success pattern) of type numbers 1 and 2 (5000 msec and 5500 msec, respectively) is different from the scale of the display mode A-2 (failure pattern) of type number 3 (4800 msec). Although the case where it is set as an example is given as an example, the scale of the success pattern and the scale of the failure pattern may be set the same.

  Next, the change animation of type number 4 will be described. In the change animation of type number 4, display mode B-1 is set. The display mode B-1 is a display mode in which when the Yoshimune 801 that appears from above in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and gradually descends contacts any one icon, the display mode of the icon is changed. . In this embodiment, Yoshimune 801 that gradually descends always touches one of the icons, and the display mode of the icon is always changed. Therefore, the “minimum change number” and the “maximum change number” are both 1 is set, and “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 100%. In addition, the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to “3.5”, and the “scale (msec)” is set to 4800 msec.

  Next, the change animation of type number 5 will be described. In the change animation of type number 5, display mode C-1 is set. The display mode C-1 is a Yoshimune 801 appearing from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or a character image of a spear pattern (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “爺”) 813. When a thousand box is thrown toward the icon, the thousand box contacts with the icon, and the display mode of the icon can be changed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “success pattern”). “Minimum change number” is set to 0, and “Maximum change number” is set to 2. The “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 40%, and the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to 1. The “scale (msec)” is set to 3500 msec.

  Next, the change animation of type number 6 will be described. In the change animation of type number 6, display mode C-2 is set. In display mode C-2, although Yoshimune 801 threw a thousand boxes toward the icon from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the thousand boxes do not touch the icon, and all icons are displayed. This is a display mode in which the mode is not changed (hereinafter may be referred to as “failure pattern”). In the present embodiment, the display mode C-2 is a failure pattern in which the display mode of all icons is not changed, so that “minimum change number” and “maximum change number” are both set to 0. The “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 0%, and the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to 0. The “scale (msec)” is set to 3500 msec. In the present embodiment, a case where the scale (3500 msec) of the display mode C-1 (success pattern) of the classification number 5 and the scale (3500 msec) of the display mode C-2 (failure pattern) of the classification number 6 are set to be the same. As an example, the success pattern scale and the failure pattern scale may be set differently.

  Next, the change animation of type number 7 will be described. In the change animation of type number 7, display mode D is set. The display mode D is a display mode in which the bomb 817 flying toward the icon from the right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 explodes and the display mode of some icons can be changed. “Minimum change number” is set to 0, and “Maximum change number” is set to 5. The “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 20%, and the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to 0.5. The “scale (msec)” is set to 1500 msec.

  The change animation with the classification numbers 1 to 7 and the classification number 8 with the “maximum number of changes” being 4 is set to be executed when the special figure variation game by the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is performed. Since the “maximum number of changes” of the change animations of the classification numbers 1 to 6 and the classification number 8 is 4, when the change animations of the classification numbers 1 to 6 and the classification number 8 are executed, the hold icon and the variation icon In total, the display mode of up to four icons can be changed. Further, since the “maximum number of changes” of the change animation of type number 7 is set to 5, when the change animation of type number 7 is executed, a maximum of five icons, that is, all of the hold icons and the change icons, that is, all In some cases, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon of the icon can be changed.

  Furthermore, the change animation of type number 8 will be described. In the change animation of type number 8, display mode E is set. The display mode E is an icon display mode triggered by a player who has visually recognized that the icon displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed to the image of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136. Is a display mode that can be changed. The “minimum change number” is set to 0, and the “maximum change number” is set to 4 or 8. The “elevation reliability (%)” is set to 80%, and the “average number of promotion at the time of mode change” is set to 1. The “scale (msec)” is set to 2000 msec. As described above, 4 or 8 is set as the “maximum number of changes” of the change animation of type number 8. Therefore, the change animation of type number 8 is set to be executed when a special figure variation game with a special figure 2 priority change having a “maximum change number” of 4, and the “maximum change number” is set to “maximum change number”. It is set to be executed when a special figure variation game is performed with a start opening winning order variation of 8.

  Next, the “execution probability” will be described. “Execution probability” indicates the probability that the change animation of type numbers 1 to 8 is executed when the special figure variation game by the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is performed. In the present embodiment, when any of the classification numbers 1 to 8 is executed, first, the random number is extracted from the first random number counter for classification number execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 and stored in the ROM 406. Using the execution lottery first table, any set of type numbers 1 to 3 (hereinafter referred to as “A set”) or type numbers 4 to 8 (hereinafter referred to as “B set”). Judge whether to win. The probability that the group A wins and the probability that the group B wins are both ½, for example. When the A group is won, the random number value is extracted from the second random number counter for type number execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and further lottery is performed using the second type number execution lottery second table stored in the ROM 406. A determination is made as to which change animation of number 1, type number 2 or type number 3 is to be executed. The lottery is set so that the probability that the change animation of type number 1 is executed is “medium”, and the probability that the change animation of type number 2 is executed is set to “low”. The probability that the change animation of type number 3 is executed is set to “high”. In addition, even when the group B is won, the random number value is extracted from the third random number counter for type number execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and further lottery is performed using the third type number execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406. Then, a determination is made as to which of the classification numbers 4 to 8 is executed. The probabilities that the change animations of the respective category numbers 4 to 8 are won are set to be the same rate, for example. In this case, the probability that the change animations of various numbers 4 to 8 are executed is 1/2 × 1/5 = 1/10, respectively. In this embodiment, in order to particularly indicate that the execution probability of the change animation of type numbers 1 to 3 is set to high or low, the execution probability of the change animation of type number 1 is “medium”, the type number The execution probability of the change animation of No. 2 is “low”, the execution probability of the change animation of type number 3 is “high”, and the execution probability of the change animation of type numbers 4 to 8 is indicated by “−”. In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives information from the main control unit 300 that the special figure variable game is a variable game due to variation in the starting order winning order, the type number 8 is always executed without performing the type number execution lottery. The change animation is executed.

  In addition, the numerical values given in the above “minimum number of changes”, “maximum number of changes”, “elevation reliability (%)”, “average number of promotions at the time of mode change” and “scale” are merely examples, and different numerical values are used. It may be set. In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is changed, the above-described change animation or icon change animation is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the icon is displayed without displaying the animation. There may be a case where the display mode is changed. Instead of changing, an icon whose display mode is different from “default” may be displayed at the start time.

  Next, a specific example of the effect of the change animation executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Example 1-1)
FIG. 19 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 1 according to Example 1-1 of this embodiment in time series. In FIG. 19 and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a downward bold white arrow. In FIG. 19 and each figure to be described later, the relative arrangement relationship of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is illustrated. 3 is shown differently. In FIG. 19 and each figure to be described later, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown side by side on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and below that, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure. Two display devices 214 are shown side by side. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed. Further, the illustration of the fourth pattern is omitted.

  The lower left area of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variation icon display area 711. In the variation icon display area 711, one variation icon can be displayed, and whether the variation is appropriate or not can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notification) according to the display mode of the variation icon. The variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 713 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  Also, a horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 711 is a hold icon display area 713. In the hold icon display area 713, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 713, it is possible to notify the hold number of the special figure variable game according to the number of hold icons. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 17, it is possible to notify (pre-reading advance notice) whether or not the hold is appropriate with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each hold icon. The hold icon display area 713 of the present embodiment can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area from the left to the right. I know. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1 can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the 2nd to 4th hold 2 in the second to fourth areas. The hold icons corresponding to -4 can be displayed. In this embodiment, numbers 1 to 4 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 713, respectively, and the positions of the first to fourth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. The location of the first to fourth regions may be omitted. In the hold icon display area 713 of the present embodiment, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  FIG. 19A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 19A, the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol variable display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area. In this example, the hold icons 713b to 713d are moving at a constant speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, without moving 713c and 713d until the movement of the hold icon 713b is completed, the hold icons 713b to 713d move sequentially as soon as the movement is completed. May be displayed.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 19B, the first sub-control unit 400 has received the pre-read result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, performs the execution probability lottery process, and executes the change animation of type number 1 in this example. Decide what to do. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 1, and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 1 is started. In this example, the number of icons for changing the display mode is 1, and the hold icon 713c in the second area having the second hold order is selected as the icon for changing the display mode. The change animation of type number 1 is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the movement animation and the hold icon movement animation. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation, although it is linked with the change animation when the change animation defined in the table of FIG. 18 is executed. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713c is first changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “precursor” and then changed to “blue”.

  FIG. 19C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, and the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area. Note that the hold icon is not displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation is executed, and a pre-reading notice is given in which the display mode of the hold icon 713c is changed from “default” to “precursor”. Note that the display modes of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 remain “default”.

  FIG. 19D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 1 is started. In the classification number 1, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode A-1 is used. Yes. The display mode of the hold icon 713c is “precursor”, and the icon change animation in which the display modes of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the variation icon 710 are “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 1 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 1 may be started when the icon is moved in association with the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 19 (e) shows that the change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is holding the sword and proceeds to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon 713d displayed in the three areas is cut off. The display mode of the hold icon 713c is “precursor”, and the icon change animation in which the display modes of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the variation icon 710 are “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 19F, a change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is holding the sword and is displayed in the second area while proceeding further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state where the hold icon 713b displayed in the first area is about to be cut after the hold icon 713c is cut. In addition, an icon change animation is performed in which the cut hold icon 713d is linearly cut in a horizontal direction.

  In FIG. 19 (g), a change animation of type number 1 is being executed. Yoshimune 801 holds a sword and proceeds further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the displayed fluctuation icon 710 is cut off is shown. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icons 713b and 713c are also shown with a straight line cut in a substantially horizontal direction.

  In FIG. 19 (h), the change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801, who has cut all the icons of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710, is in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The figure shows a state where the sword is held on the lower left hand side. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the change icon 710 also shows a state in which a cut is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

  FIG. 19 (i) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 1 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 turned to the right from the lower left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, an icon change animation is also being executed, and all the icons of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710 with cuts are displayed in a display mode shifted to the left and right with respect to the cuts.

  FIG. 19 (j) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 with a sword in a sheath is facing the front and smiling well. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icon 713c whose display mode is "precursor" is cracked into two, and the hold icon 713c whose display mode is "blue" appears popping up ing. Further, the fluctuation icon 710 and the hold icons 713b and 713d indicate a state in which the left / right shift disappears and the display returns to the “default” display mode with the original break. In the present embodiment, the display mode in which the pre-reading notice of the icon is changed is shown as an effect in which the hold icon 713c breaks into two and a new hold icon 713c having a different display mode appears from the inside. Is not to be done.

  FIG. 19 (k) shows a state where the change animation of type number 1 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the hold icon 713c whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the second area, indicating that the breaks of the change icon 710 and the hold icons 713b and 713d have disappeared and the icon change animation has ended.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, at the time when the change animation is started, the display is changed to a display mode with high jackpot reliability on all displayed held icons without paying attention to the specific held icon. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one hold icon, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons is changed for the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation that changes the display mode of different types of variable icons and hold icons, the frequency of execution of the change animation is increased. May be possible. For example, when considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, In some cases, it is possible to increase the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed with the animation.

(Example 1-2)
FIG. 20 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 1 according to Example 1-2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 20A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 20A, the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol variable display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 20 (b), the first sub control unit 400 has received the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, performs the execution probability lottery process, and executes the change animation of type number 1 in this example. Decide what to do. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 1, and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 1 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is to be changed is two, and the hold icon 713b in the first area with the first hold order and the hold icon 713d in the third area with the third hold order change the display form. It is selected as an icon to be changed, and further, a change animation of type number 1 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon have ended. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “green”, and the display mode of the hold icon 713c is changed from “default” to “red”. However, the display mode of the hold icon 713d is changed from “default” to “blue”.

  FIG. 20C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, and the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area. Note that the hold icon is not displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 20D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 1 is started. In the classification number 1, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode A-1 is used. Yes. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 1 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 1 may be started when the icon is moved in association with the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 20 (e) shows that the change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is holding the sword and proceeds to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon 713d displayed in the three areas is cut off. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 20F, the change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is holding the sword and is displayed in the second area while proceeding further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state where the hold icon 713b displayed in the first area is about to be cut after the hold icon 713c is cut. In addition, an icon change animation is performed in which the cut hold icon 713d is linearly cut in a horizontal direction.

  In FIG. 20 (g), a change animation of type number 1 is being executed. Yoshimune 801 holds a sword and proceeds further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, while moving to the variable icon display area 711. A state in which the displayed fluctuation icon 710 is cut off is shown. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icons 713b and 713c are also shown with a straight line cut in a substantially horizontal direction.

  In FIG. 20 (h), the change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 who has cut all the icons of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710 is in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The figure shows a state where the sword is held on the lower left hand side. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the change icon 710 also shows a state in which a cut is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

  FIG. 20 (i) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 1 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 turned to the right from the lower left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and all the icons of the cut hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710 are shifted to the right at the boundary of the cut, and the pre-reading notice from the place where the icon is shifted and becomes empty A part of the display is shown. In this example, “green” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon 713b, “red” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon 713c, and “blue” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon d. "Default" is displayed as a part of the display of the pre-reading notice of the variation icon 710. In this way, the player's expectation may be raised by showing a part of the display as the pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 20 (j) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 with the sword in the sheath is facing the front and smiling well. Further, the icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icon 713b whose display mode is “default” is broken into two, and the entire hold icon 713b whose display mode is “green” is visible. Furthermore, the hold icon 713d whose display mode is “default” is broken into two, and the entire hold icon 713d whose display mode is “blue” is visible. In addition, the hold icon 713c and the fluctuation icon 710 are displayed in a state where the icons have been returned to the “default” display mode with the original break without breaking into two. In the present embodiment, the display mode in which the pre-reading notice of the icon is changed is indicated by an effect in which a part of the display as the pre-reading notice is visible from the place where the icon is shifted to the right after the break. The display mode of the pre-read notice display is not limited to this.

  FIG. 20 (k) shows a state where the change animation of type number 1 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 20 (k), the hold icon 713b whose display mode is “green” is displayed in the first area, and the hold icon 713d whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the third area. This indicates that the break between the icon 710 and the hold icon 713b has disappeared and the icon change animation has ended.

  The display mode of the change animation executed in this example (FIGS. 20D to 20K) is the change animation executed in the above-described (Example 1-1) (FIGS. 19D to 19K). Is the same display mode. Further, the change animation executed in this example and the change animation executed in the above-described (Example 1-1) have the same scale. However, since the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, the change animation executed in this example and the change animation executed in the above-described (Example 1-1) are different change animations.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (i) to 20 (k), the hold icon 713 d displayed in the third area has a larger hit reliability than the hold icon 713 b displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713. It is set to be changed to a low display mode. Thus, like the hold icon displayed in the first area or the second area, the time taken for the special figure variable game to start is shorter than the hold icon displayed in the third area or the fourth area. The hold icon is more likely to be changed to a display mode with high jackpot reliability. For example, while the hold icon displayed in the first area or the second area is easily changed from “default” to “red” or “green”, the hold icon displayed in the third area or the fourth area is “ It is likely that it will be changed from “default” to “blue” or remain “default”. By doing in this way, there may be a case where it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player may be changed to a hold icon with a high jackpot reliability.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, at the time when the change animation is started, the display is changed to a display mode with high jackpot reliability on all displayed held icons without paying attention to the specific held icon. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one hold icon, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons is changed for the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation that changes the display mode of different types of variable icons and hold icons, the frequency of execution of the change animation is increased. May be possible. For example, when considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, In some cases, it is possible to increase the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed with the animation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the display mode of a plurality of icons can be changed from 0 by executing one change animation, there is no change animation for each number of icons whose display mode is changed. In some cases, the design can be simplified.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the design of the plurality of animations is made the same, so that it is not necessary to consider the influence on other displays and effects due to the difference in the scales. There are cases where it is possible.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, although the same animation is being executed, the number of icons whose display mode changes may be different, so that it is displayed to the player at the time of execution of the animation. In some cases, it may not be possible to reliably identify the number of icons that will change aspect.

(Example 1-3)
FIG. 21 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 1 according to Example 1-3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 21A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 21A, the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 21B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol variable display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 21 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 has received the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, performs the execution probability lottery process, and executes the change animation of type number 3 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 3, and determines which display order of the hold icon related to the hold of which hold order is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 3 is started. In this example, 0 is selected as the number of icons for changing the display mode, and the change animation of type number 3 is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. I'm trying to get started. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “green”, but is not changed from “default”. While the display mode is changed from “default” to “blue”, the display mode is not changed from “default”.

  FIG. 21C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the movement animation of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, and the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area. Note that the hold icon is not displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 21D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 3 is started. In the classification number 3, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode A-2 is used, so that the Yoshimune 801 that appears with a sword in the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Yes. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 3 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons are ended, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 3 may be started when the icon is moved in association with the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 21 (e) shows that the change animation of type number 3 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 holds the sword and proceeds to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, while The hold icon 713d displayed in the three areas is cut off. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 21F shows that the change animation of type number 3 is being executed. Yoshimune 801 is holding the sword and is displayed in the second area while proceeding further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state where the hold icon 713b displayed in the first area is about to be cut after the hold icon 713c is cut. In addition, an icon change animation is performed in which the cut hold icon 713d is linearly cut in a horizontal direction.

  FIG. 21 (g) shows that the change animation of type number 3 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 holds a sword and proceeds further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, while entering the variable icon display area 711. A state in which the displayed fluctuation icon 710 is cut off is shown. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icons 713b and 713c are also shown with a straight line cut in a substantially horizontal direction.

  In FIG. 21 (h), the change animation of type number 3 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 who has finished cutting all the icons of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710 is in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The figure shows a state where the sword is held on the lower left hand side. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the change icon 710 also shows a state in which a cut is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

  FIG. 21 (i) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 3 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 turned to the right from the lower left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and all the icons of the cut hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710 are shifted to the right at the boundary of the cut, and the pre-reading notice from the place where the icon is shifted and becomes empty A part of the display is shown. In this example, “green” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon 713b, “default” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon 713c and the change icon 710, and a prefetch notice display of the hold icon d is displayed. “Blue” is displayed as the part. In this way, the player's expectation may be raised by showing a part of the display as the pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 21 (j) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 3 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 with the sword placed in the scabbard is facing the front and crying. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 are displayed in a state in which they are returned to the “default” display mode with the original break. As in this example, the display mode (for example, Yoshimune's facial expression) of a part of the change animation may be varied depending on the number of icons whose display mode has been changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode in which the pre-reading notice of the icon can be changed is shown by an effect in which a part of the display as the pre-reading notice is visible from the place where the icon is shifted to the right after the break. However, the display mode of the pre-read notice display is not limited to this.

  FIG. 21 (k) shows a state where the change animation of type number 3 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 is disappointed and turns to the back and moves to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, FIG. 21 (k) shows that the breaks of the hold icons 713b to 713 and the change icon 710 have disappeared and the icon change animation has ended.

  Of the display modes (FIGS. 21D to 21K) of the change animation executed in this example, FIGS. 21D to 21I show the change animation executed in the above-described (Example 1-1). 19 (d) to (i) in FIG. 19 (d) to (i), and the change animation (FIG. 20) executed in the above-described (Example 1-2). It is the same display mode as FIG.20 (d)-(i) of (d)-(k)). Further, the scale of the change animation executed in this example may be the same as the scale of the change animation executed in the above-described (Example 1-1) or (Example 1-2).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, at the time when the change animation is started, the display is changed to a display mode with high jackpot reliability on all displayed held icons without paying attention to the specific held icon. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one hold icon, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons is changed for the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation that changes the display mode of different types of variable icons and hold icons, the frequency of execution of the change animation is increased. May be possible. For example, when considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, In some cases, it is possible to increase the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed with the animation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the display mode of a plurality of icons can be changed from 0 by executing one change animation, there is no change animation for each number of icons whose display mode is changed. In some cases, the design can be simplified.

(Example 1-4)
FIG. 22 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 2 according to Example 1-4 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 22A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 22 (a), the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 22 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative display variable display starts in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 22 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 has received the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, performs the execution probability lottery process, and executes the change animation of type number 2 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 2 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Further, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 2 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is to be changed is two, and the hold icon 713b in the first area with the first hold order and the hold icon 713d in the third area with the third hold order change the display form. It is selected as the icon to be changed, and the change animation of type number 2 is started after a lapse of a predetermined time after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “blue”, and the display mode of the hold icon 713c is changed from “default” to “red”. It is made to change from “default” while showing it to be changed to “red”, and the display mode of the hold icon 713d is changed from “default” to “green” while showing to change from “default”. .

  FIG. 22C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, and the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area. Note that the hold icon is not displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 22D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 2 is started. In the classification number 2, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode A-1 is used. Yes. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 2 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of the classification number 2 may be started when the icon is moved in association with the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 22E, a change animation of type number 2 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is holding a sword and proceeds to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, while the second icon in the hold icon display area 713 is displayed. The hold icon 713d displayed in the three areas is cut off. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 22F shows that the change animation of type number 2 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is holding the sword and is displayed in the second area while proceeding further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state where the hold icon 713b displayed in the first area is about to be cut after the hold icon 713c is cut. In addition, an icon change animation is performed in which the cut hold icon 713d is linearly cut in a horizontal direction.

  In FIG. 22 (g), a change animation of type number 2 is being executed. Yoshimune 801 holds a sword and proceeds further to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the displayed fluctuation icon 710 is cut off is shown. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icons 713b and 713c are also shown with a straight line cut in a substantially horizontal direction.

  In FIG. 22 (h), a change animation of type number 2 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801, who has cut all the icons of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710, The figure shows a state where the sword is held on the lower left hand side. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and the change icon 710 also shows a state in which a cut is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

  FIG. 22 (i) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 2 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 turned to the right from the lower left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, an icon change animation is also being executed, and all the icons of the cut hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710 are shifted to the right at the boundary of the cut, and the pre-reading notice from the place where the icon is shifted and becomes empty A part of the display is shown. In this example, “blue” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon 713b, “red” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon 713c, and “green” is displayed as a part of the prefetch notice display of the hold icon d. "Default" is displayed as a part of the display of the pre-reading notice of the variation icon 710. In this way, the player's expectation may be raised by showing a part of the display as the pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 22 (j) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 2 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 with a sword placed in the sheath is facing the front and smiling well. Further, the icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icon 713b whose display mode is “default” is broken into two, and the entire hold icon 713b whose display mode is “blue” is visible. Furthermore, the hold icon 713d whose display mode is “default” is broken into two, and the entire hold icon 713d whose display mode is “green” is visible. In addition, the hold icon 713c and the fluctuation icon 710 are displayed in a state where the icons have been returned to the “default” display mode with the original break without breaking into two. In the present embodiment, the display mode in which the pre-reading notice of the icon is changed is indicated by an effect in which a part of the display as the pre-reading notice is visible from the place where the icon is shifted to the right after the break. The display mode of the pre-read notice display is not limited to this.

  FIG. 22 (k) shows that the change animation of type number 2 is being executed, and following FIG. 22 (j), Yoshimune 801 with the sword in the scabbard is facing the front and smiling well. Show. Further, the icon change animation is also being executed, and the hold icon 713d whose display mode is “green” is further broken into two, and the entire hold icon 713d whose display mode is “red” is visible.

  FIG. 22 (l) shows a state where the change animation of type number 2 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 22 (l), a hold icon 713b whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the first area, and a hold icon 713d whose display mode is “red” is displayed in the third area. This indicates that the break between the icon 710 and the hold icon 713c has disappeared and the icon change animation has ended.

  In the change animation executed in this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713d is changed step by step over two steps, so the above-described (Example 1-1) and ( The scale may be longer than in Example 1-2). Moreover, FIG.22 (d)-(j) is displayed by the above-mentioned (Example 1-1) among the display modes (FIG.22 (d)-(l)) of the change animation performed in this example. Of the change animations (FIGS. 19D to 19K), the display mode is the same as that of FIGS. 19D to 19J, and the change animation executed in the above-described (Example 1-2) ( It is the same display mode as FIG.20 (d)-(j) of FIG.20 (d)-(k)). Of the display modes (FIGS. 22D to 22L) of the change animation executed in this example, FIGS. 22D to 22I are executed in the above-described (Example 1-3). It is the same display mode as FIG.19 (d)-(i) of change animation (FIG.21 (d)-(k)).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, at the time when the change animation is started, the display is changed to a display mode with high jackpot reliability on all displayed held icons without paying attention to the specific held icon. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one hold icon, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons is changed for the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation that changes the display mode of different types of variable icons and hold icons, the frequency of execution of the change animation is increased. May be possible. For example, when considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, In some cases, it is possible to increase the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed with the animation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the display mode of a plurality of icons can be changed from 0 by executing one change animation, there is no change animation for each number of icons whose display mode is changed. In some cases, the design can be simplified.

(Example 2)
FIG. 23 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 4 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 23A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decoration symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 23B, the first sub-control unit 400 has received the pre-reading result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an execution probability lottery process with reference to “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, and executes the change animation of type number 4 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 4 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Further, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 4 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is 1 and the hold icon 713c in the second area having the second hold order is selected as the icon for changing the display mode, and further, the movement between the hold / change icons is performed. The change animation of type number 4 is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the animation and the moving animation of the hold icon. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713c is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “family crest”.

  FIG. 23C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon is finished. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, and the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area. Note that the hold icon is not displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 23D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 4 is started. In type number 4, as described with reference to FIG. 18, display mode B-1 is used, so that Yoshimune 801 that appears from above in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and gradually descends is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, at the same time as the start of the change animation of the type number 4, the “high” possibility that the display mode is likely to be changed is determined immediately above the hold icon 713b so that the player can identify and pay attention to the icon. Although an arrow image in which “attention” is written is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and another image may be displayed or the image itself may not be displayed. Further, while the icon is specified and noticed by the player, the Yoshimune 801 may descend and come into contact with an icon different from the specified and noticed icon, and the display mode of the icon may be changed. In this embodiment, the change animation of type number 4 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 4 may be started when the icon is moved in association with the execution of the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 23E shows a state in which a change animation of type number 4 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 is further lowered from above in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 23 (f), a change animation of type number 4 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is further lowered from above in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is slightly covered by the image of the arrow. The status is displayed. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 23 (g), a change animation of type number 4 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 further descends from above in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and descends to a hold icon 713c (not shown). In addition, a state in which a hold icon 713c and an effect image (hereinafter referred to as “effect”) 803 covering the periphery of the hold icon 713c appear. FIG. 23G shows a state where the hold icon 713 c cannot be visually recognized by the effect 803. On-hold icon 713c In addition, the icon change animation in which the on-hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 are displayed as “default” continues.

  FIG. 23 (h) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 4 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 is jumping from the hold icon 713c in the lower left hand direction in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the transmittance of the change animation effect 803 is increased, and the icon change animation being executed displays a state where the hold icon 713 c hidden by the effect 803 is becoming visible. In addition, the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 is maintained at “default”.

  In FIG. 23 (i), a change animation of type number 4 is being executed, a state in which Yoshimune 801 has landed at the lower left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed, and the transmittance of the effect 803 is It has risen further. In the icon change animation, a state in which the display mode of the hold icon 713c can be barely confirmed to be changed to “family crest” is displayed, and the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default”. continuing.

  FIG. 23 (j) shows that the change animation of type number 4 is being executed, the state where Yoshimune 801 is facing the front and smiling well, and the transmittance of the effect 803 further increases. Yes. In the icon change animation, a state in which it can be clearly confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713c has changed to “family crest” is displayed, and the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default”. Is continuing.

  FIG. 23 (k) shows a state where the change animation of type number 4 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a hold icon 713c whose display mode is “family crest” is displayed in the second area, indicating that the icon change animation is ended while the display modes of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the variation icon 710 remain “default”. .

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the player can be focused on an icon whose display mode is likely to be changed when the change animation is started. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the icon that the player should pay attention to can be specified, and therefore the player's expectation may not be wasted.

(Example 3-1)
FIG. 24 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 5 according to Example 3-1 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 24A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 24B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative display variable display starts in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 24B, the first sub-control unit 400 has received the pre-read result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an execution probability lottery process with reference to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, and executes the change animation of type number 5 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 5 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Further, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 5 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is 1 and the hold icon 713b in the first region having the first hold order is selected as the icon for changing the display mode, and further, the movement between the hold / change icons is performed. The change animation of type number 5 is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the animation and the moving animation of the hold icon. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “red”.

  FIG. 24C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. During the execution of the special figure 1 floating game, the fourth LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on in accordance with the winning of the ball at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is 3 It is displayed that it has increased from 4 to 4. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area, and the hold icon 713e is displayed. It is displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 24D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 5 is started. In the classification number 5, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode C-1 is used, so the left half of Yoshimune 801 appearing from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 5 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 5 may be started in response to the movement of the icon accompanying the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 24E, a change animation of type number 5 is being executed, and images of a thousand boxes from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter referred to as “thousand boxes”) 805, 806. The whole body of Yoshimune 801, which appears in carrying Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 24F, the change animation of type number 5 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 throws two thousand boxes 805 and 806 from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the thousand boxes 805 and 806 are displayed. Both show the state immediately before hitting the hold icon 713b. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. When the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, the flight trajectory of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 may also be different. Therefore, the visibility of the image (for example, background) displayed on the back of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 is changed for each change animation. May be different. In addition, when the number of icons to be changed is different, a display mode common to a plurality of change animations (for example, a display mode in which Yoshimune throws a thousand boxes) and a different display mode (for example, the number of thousand boxes and a thousand boxes) Both of the flight trajectories) may be included. That is, just because the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, it is not necessary that all of the display contents are different, and at least a part of the display may be different.

  In FIG. 24 (g), the change animation of type number 5 is being executed, and both the thousand boxes 805 and 806 thrown by Yoshimune 801 hit the hold icon 713b, and an effect 807 covering the hold icon 713b and its surroundings appears. Is displayed. FIG. 24G shows a state where the hold icon 713b cannot be visually recognized due to the effect 807. FIG. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 24 (h) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 5 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 turns around and smiles well. Further, the transmittance of the change animation effect 807 is increased, and the icon change animation being executed displays a state in which it can be clearly confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713b has changed to “red”. Further, the display mode of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the change icon 710 is maintained at “default”. In this embodiment, the display mode changes from “default” to “prior”, “blue”, “green” and “red” in four stages. In this way, when a plurality of thousands of boxes hits one icon, the display mode of the icon is likely to change over many stages than when one thousand boxes hits one icon.

  FIG. 24 (i) shows a state where the change animation of type number 5 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a hold icon 713b whose display mode is “red” is displayed in the first area, indicating that the icon change animation has ended while the display modes of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the variation icon 710 remain “default”. .

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by changing the display mode of the change animation every time the display mode of the icon is changed, the display of the change animation is started when the display of the change animation is started. It may be possible to specify the number of icons whose table aspect may be changed. As a result, the number of icons that the player should pay attention to is specified, and the player's expectation may not be wasted. By displaying the change animation in such various ways, the player's interest may be improved.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.

(Example 3-2)
FIG. 25 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 5 according to Example 3-2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 25A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 25 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 has received the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an execution probability lottery process with reference to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, and executes the change animation of type number 5 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 5 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Further, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 5 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is two, and the hold icon 713b in the first region having the first hold order and the hold icon 713d in the third region having the third hold order change the display modes. Furthermore, a change animation of type number 5 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon have ended. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “blue”, and the display mode of the hold icon 713d is changed from “default” to “green”. I try to let them.

  FIG. 25C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. During the execution of the special figure 1 floating game, the fourth LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on in accordance with the winning of the ball at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is 3 It is displayed that it has increased from 4 to 4. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area, and the hold icon 713e is displayed. It is displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 25D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 5 is started. In the classification number 5, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode C-1 is used, so the left half of Yoshimune 801 appearing from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 5 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 5 may be started in response to the movement of the icon accompanying the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 25 (e), the change animation of type number 5 is being executed, and the whole body of Yoshimune 801 appearing carrying the thousand boxes 805 and 806 from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 25 (f), a change animation of type number 5 is being executed, Yoshimune 801 throws two thousand boxes 805 and 806 from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the thousand boxes 805 is a holding icon. 713b shows a state immediately before the thousand-card box 806 hits the hold icon 713d. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. When the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, the flight trajectory of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 may also be different. Therefore, the visibility of the image (for example, background) displayed on the back of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 is changed for each change animation. May be different. In addition, when the number of icons to be changed is different, a display mode that is common to a plurality of change animations (for example, a display mode in which Yoshimune 801 throws a thousand boxes 805 and 806) and a different display mode (for example, a thousand boxes) And the flight trajectory of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 may be included. That is, just because the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, it is not necessary that all of the display contents are different, and at least a part of the display may be different.

  FIG. 25 (g) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 5 is being executed, the thousand box 805 thrown by Yoshimune 801 hits the hold icon 713b, and the effect 809 covering the hold icon 713b and its surroundings appears. Has been. FIG. 25G shows a state where the hold icon 713 b cannot be visually recognized by the effect 809. FIG. 25G shows a state in which the thousand-thousand box 806 thrown by Yoshimune 801 hits the hold icon 713d and an effect 811 covering the hold icon 713d and its surroundings appears. FIG. 25G shows a state where the hold icon 713d cannot be visually recognized by the effect 811. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713c and 713e and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 25 (h) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 5 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 turns around the front and smiles well. Further, the transparency of the change animation effects 809 and 811 is increased, and in the icon change animation being executed, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed to “blue”, and the display mode of the hold icon 713d is “green”. A state where it can be clearly confirmed that the change has been made is displayed. Further, the display modes of the hold icons 713c and 713e and the change icon 710 are maintained at “default”. In this example, the display mode of all the holding icons 713b and 713d hit by the thousand boxes 805 and 806 is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. There may be a pattern that does not change the display mode of 713d. Further, in this example, the plurality of hold icons 713b and 713d hitting the thousand-thousand boxes 805 and 806 at the same timing are changed to different display modes. However, the display mode (big hit reliability) is not limited to this. The same may be arranged. Also, the timing at which the hold icons 713b and 713d hidden by the effects 809 and 811 become visible again may be different or the same between the plurality of hold icons 713b and 713d.

  FIG. 25 (i) shows a state where the change animation of type number 5 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the hold icon 713b whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713d whose display mode is “green” is displayed in the third area, and the display modes of the hold icons 713c and 713e and the variation icon 710 are displayed. Indicates that the icon change animation is finished with “default”.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by changing the display mode of the change animation every time the display mode of the icon is changed, the display of the change animation is started when the display of the change animation is started. It may be possible to specify the number of icons whose table aspect may be changed. As a result, the number of icons that the player should pay attention to is specified, and the player's expectation may not be wasted. By displaying the change animation in such various ways, the player's interest may be improved.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.
In this embodiment, the two thousand boxes thrown by Yoshimune contact each of the two icons, and the display mode of both of the touched icons is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. While throwing, only one of them may be in contact with the icon, while changing the display mode of the contacted icon, the other may not be in contact with any icon. In addition, although each of the plurality of thousands of boxes touches the icon, there may be a case where the display mode of one icon changes and the display mode of the other icon does not change.

(Example 3-3)
FIG. 26 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 6 according to Example 3-3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 26A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 26 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 receives the pre-read result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an execution probability lottery process with reference to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, and executes the change animation of type number 6 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 6 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 6 is started. In this example, 0 is selected as the number of icons for changing the display mode, and the change animation of type number 6 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are completed. I'm trying to get started. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG.

  FIG. 26C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon. During the execution of the special figure 1 floating game, the fourth LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on in accordance with the winning of the ball at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is 3 It is displayed that it has increased from 4 to 4. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area, and the hold icon 713e is displayed. It is displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 26D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 6 has been started. In the classification number 6, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode C-2 is used, so the left half of Yoshimune 801 appearing from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. In this embodiment, the change animation of the classification number 6 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of the classification number 6 may be started when the icon is moved in association with the execution of the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 26 (e), a change animation of type number 6 is being executed, and the whole body of Yoshimune 801 appearing carrying the thousand boxes 805 and 806 from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 26F, a change animation of type number 6 is being executed. Yoshimune 801 throws two thousand boxes 805 and 806 from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and Both of the icons do not hit any of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710, and show a state of flying in different directions. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. As in this example, there may be a pattern in which neither of the two thousand-dollar boxes 805 and 806 hits any of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the change icon 710 and does not change the display mode of any icon.

  FIG. 26 (g) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 6 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 has a disappointed face. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 26 (h) shows that the change animation of type number 6 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 has a disappointed face and turns back to go to the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state that is going to be done. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 26 (i) shows a state where the change animation of type number 6 ends. The figure shows a state where Yoshimune 801 smiles and turns to the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the icon change animation is ended while the display modes of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the variation icon 710 remain “default”.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by changing the display mode of the change animation every time the display mode of the icon is changed, the display of the change animation is started when the display of the change animation is started. It may be possible to specify the number of icons whose table aspect may be changed. As a result, the number of icons that the player should pay attention to is specified, and the player's expectation may not be wasted. By displaying the change animation in such various ways, the player's interest may be improved.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.
Further, in this embodiment, since the plurality of thousands of boxes did not contact any icon, the display mode of the icons did not change, but not limited to this, for example, each of the plurality of thousands of boxes touched the icon. Regardless, the display mode of any icon may not change.

(Example 3-4)
FIG. 27 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 5 according to Example 3-4 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 27A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 27B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative display variable display starts in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 27B, the first sub-control unit 400 has received the pre-read result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an execution probability lottery process with reference to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, and executes the change animation of type number 5 in this example. Decide what to do. However, unlike the change animation of the classification number 5 in the embodiment of FIG. 25, a kite 813 appears in place of Yoshimune 801. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 5 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Further, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 5 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is 1 and the hold icon 713b in the first region having the first hold order is selected as the icon for changing the display mode, and further, the movement between the hold / change icons is performed. The change animation of type number 5 is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the animation and the moving animation of the hold icon. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “blue”.

  FIG. 27C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. During the execution of the special figure 1 floating game, the fourth LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on in accordance with the winning of the ball at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is 3 It is displayed that it has increased from 4 to 4. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area, and the hold icon 713e is displayed. It is displayed in the fourth area. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 27D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 5 is started. In the classification number 5, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode C-1 is used, so the left half of the bag 813 that appears from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 5 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 5 may be started in response to the movement of the icon accompanying the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 27E, a change animation of type number 5 is being executed, and the whole body of the bag 813 that appears carrying the thousand boxes 805 and 806 from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. . Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 27F, the change animation of type number 5 is being executed, and the bag 813 throws two thousand boxes 805 and 806 from the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the thousand boxes 805 and 806 are displayed. Both show the state immediately before hitting the hold icon 713b. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. When the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, the flight trajectory of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 may also be different. Therefore, the visibility of the image (for example, background) displayed on the back of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 is changed for each change animation. May be different. In addition, when the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, a display mode (for example, a display mode in which the basket 813 throws the thousand boxes 805 and 806) is different from a common display mode (for example, a thousand boxes). And the flight trajectory of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 may be included. That is, just because the number of icons whose display mode is changed is different, it is not necessary that all of the display contents are different, and at least a part of the display may be different.

  In FIG. 27 (g), the change animation of type number 5 is being executed, and both of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 thrown by the spear 813 hit the hold icon 713b, and an effect 815 covering the hold icon 713b and its surroundings appears. Is displayed. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 27 (h) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 5 is being executed and the bag 813 turns around and smiles well. Further, the transmittance of the effect 815 of the change animation is increased, and the icon change animation being executed displays a state in which it can be clearly confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713b has changed to “blue”. Further, the display mode of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the change icon 710 is maintained at “default”.

  FIG. 27 (i) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 5 ends. A state is shown in which the bag 813 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower right hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with its back turned. In addition, a hold icon 713b whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the first area, indicating that the icon change animation is ended while the display modes of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the variation icon 710 remain “default”. .

  The display mode (FIGS. 27 (d) to (i)) of the change animation executed in this example and the change animation (FIGS. 24 (d) to (i)) executed in the above (Example 3-1) are as follows. The difference is whether the character is Yoshimune 801 or 爺 813, and the other display modes are the same. Although not shown, in addition to the difference in the character's face, for example, the lighting pattern of the game board lamp 532 and the game frame lamp 542 may be different, and is reproduced when an animation is displayed. The sound may be different. In other words, it is only necessary that some aspects of the plurality of animations are common and other aspects are different. The common / difference parts are not limited to display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by changing the display mode of the change animation every time the display mode of the icon is changed, the display of the change animation is started when the display of the change animation is started. It may be possible to specify the number of icons whose table aspect may be changed. As a result, the number of icons that the player should pay attention to is specified, and the player's expectation may not be wasted. By displaying the change animation in such various ways, the player's interest may be improved.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.

  In the above (Embodiment 3-1) to (Embodiment 3-4), the four types of change animation have been described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27. Hereinafter, how to hold the image data of these change animations. explain. In the following description, the area at the lower right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 where the change animation by Yoshimune 801 or 爺 813 is displayed is denoted as display area α, and the change animation by the thousand boxes 805 and 806 is executed. This area is denoted as display area β. A change animation executed in the display area α and a change animation executed in the display area β are combined to form one change animation.

  24 and FIG. 27, Yoshimune 801 is displayed in the display area α of FIG. 24, 爺 813 is displayed in the display area α of FIG. 27, and is displayed in the display area α of FIGS. The display mode of the change animation is different. In addition, the display mode of the change animations of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 displayed in the display area β of FIG. 24 and the display area β of FIG. 27 is the same.

  Furthermore, regarding the change animation of FIGS. 24 to 26, Yoshimune 801 is displayed in all the display areas α of FIGS. 24 to 26, and the change animation displayed in the display area α of FIGS. Are the same. Moreover, the display modes of the change animations of the thousand boxes 805 and 806 displayed in the display area β of FIGS. 24 to 26 are different.

  As a way of holding the image data for change animation in the first sub-control unit 400, image data including both images displayed in the display area α and the display area β is stored in the ROM 406 as image data of the change animation. Alternatively, the image data displayed in the display area α and the display area β are individually stored in the ROM 406, and are reproduced in a timely manner so that they are displayed as if they were one change animation. Also good. Further, data may be stored separately for each animation, as long as a part of the appearance when the animation is displayed is common and the other part is different.

(Example 4-1)
FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 7 according to Example 4-1 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 28A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 28A, the special figure E (hidden probability change) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a hit (hidden probability change) is Stop is displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 28B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 28 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 has received the pre-reading result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub-control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, performs the execution probability lottery process, and executes the change animation of type number 7 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 7 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 7 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is two, and the hold icon 713b in the first area having the first hold order and the hold icon 713d in the third area having the third hold order are displayed. It is selected as an icon whose mode is to be changed, and the change animation of type number 7 is started at the timing when the icon starts moving in accordance with the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon. I have to. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “red”.

  FIG. 28B shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 7 is started. In the classification number 7, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode D is used. , “Bomb”.) 817 displays a state of being positioned near the upper portion of the hold icon 713d. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 7 is started when the movement of the holding icon and the moving icon of the holding icon and the moving animation of the holding icon are executed. For example, the change animation of the type number 7 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons have ended.

  FIG. 28C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, and the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area. Note that the hold icon is not displayed in the fourth area. Further, in FIG. 28C, the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, and further moves to the left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and flies near the upper part between the holding icons 713c and 713d. A bomb 817 is displayed. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b to 713d and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 28D shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the bomb 817 exploded, and the change icon 710, the hold icons 713b to 713d, and the effect 819 covering the periphery thereof have appeared. FIG. 28D shows a state in which neither the fluctuation icon 710 nor the hold icons 713b to 713d can be visually recognized by the effect 819. That is, an icon other than the hold icon whose display mode is changed by the icon change animation is also hidden by the effect 819 by the change animation and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 28E shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed and the effect 819 has changed to a smoke image (hereinafter referred to as “smoke”) 821. The state where neither the fluctuation icon 710 nor the hold icons 713b to 713d can be visually recognized due to the smoke 821 is continued. In addition, FIG. 28 (e) turns on the fourth LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 when a ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Thus, it is displayed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased from 3 to 4.

  In FIG. 28 (f), the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, and the smoke 821 becomes slightly smaller toward the center of the hold icon display area 713, and both the increased hold icon 713e and the fluctuation icon 710 are A part of the image is visible. Further, since the smoke 821 of the change animation has become slightly smaller, the icon change animation being executed displays a state in which it can be confirmed that the display mode of the change icon 710 is maintained at “default”. Further, since smoke 821 overlaps most of the hold icon 713e, the display mode of the hold icon 713c cannot be clearly confirmed.

  In FIG. 28 (g), the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 becomes smaller toward the center of the hold icon display area 713, and both the hold icon 713e and the fluctuation icon 710 are all of them. The state which became visible is shown. In addition, since the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced, the icon change animation being executed displays a state in which it can be clearly confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713e is maintained at “default”. .

  In FIG. 28 (h), the change animation of the type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 is further reduced toward the center of the hold icon display area 713, and the majority of the hold icon 713b can be further visually confirmed. Indicates the state. Further, since the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced, the icon change animation being executed displays a state where it can be clearly confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713b has changed to “red”.

  FIG. 28 (i) shows that the change animation of the type number 7 is being executed, and the smoke 821 becomes smaller toward the center of the hold icon display area 713, and a part of the hold icon 713c and most of the hold icons 713d. Also shows a state where it is further visible. That is, since the smoke 821 is reduced toward the center of the hold icon display area 713, the icons displayed in an area away from the center of the hold icon display area 713 can be viewed in order. In addition, since the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced, the icon change animation being executed displays a state where it can be clearly confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713d has changed to “red”. Further, since smoke 821 overlaps most of the hold icon 713c, the display mode of the hold icon 713c cannot be clearly confirmed.

  FIG. 28J shows that the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 becomes smaller toward the center of the hold icon display area 713, and the transmittance of the smoke 821 increases, so that the hold icon A state in which most of 713c is visible is shown. As the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced and the transmittance of the smoke 821 is increased, it is clear that the display mode of the hold icon 713c is maintained at “default” in the icon change animation being executed. The status that can be confirmed is displayed.

  FIG. 28 (k) shows that the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 becomes smaller toward the center of the hold icon display area 713, and the transmittance of the smoke 821 further increases, and the hold is made. Both icons 713c and 713d show a state where almost all of them are visible. Because the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced and the transmittance of the smoke 821 is further increased, the display mode of the hold icon 713c is maintained at “default” in the icon change animation being executed and the hold A state is displayed in which it is possible to more clearly confirm that the display mode of the icon 713d has changed to “red”.

  FIG. 28 (l) shows a state where the change animation of type number 7 ends. A state where the smoke 821 is completely extinguished is shown. In addition, a hold icon 713b whose display mode is “red” is displayed in the first area, a hold icon 713d whose display mode is also “red” is displayed in the third area, and the hold icons 713c and 713e and the change icon 710 are displayed. It is shown that the icon change animation is ended while the display mode of “No.” remains “default”.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.

(Example 4-2)
FIG. 29 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 7 according to Example 4-2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 29A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 29A, the special figure E (hidden probability change) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is two, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a hit (hidden probability change) is Stop is displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a and 713b are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 29B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol variable display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 29 (b), the first sub control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, performs the execution probability lottery process, and executes the change animation of type number 7 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 7 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 7 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is 1 and the hold icon 713b in the first region having the first hold order is selected as the icon for changing the display mode, and further, the movement between the hold / change icons is performed. The change animation of the type number 7 is started at the timing when the icon starts moving in accordance with the execution of the animation and the moving animation of the hold icon. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “blue”.

  FIG. 29B shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 7 is started. In the classification number 7, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode D is used. Therefore, the bomb 817 flying from the lower right hand side to the left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the third. A state of being positioned near the upper part between the area and the fourth area is displayed. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 713b and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 7 is started when the movement of the holding icon and the moving icon of the holding icon and the moving animation of the holding icon are executed. For example, the change animation of the type number 7 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons have ended.

  FIG. 29 (c) shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, and the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area. Note that no hold icon is displayed in the second to fourth areas. In FIG. 29 (c), a change animation of type number 7 is being executed, and further moves to the left-hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the vicinity of the upper part between the second area and the third area. A flying bomb 817 is displayed. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 713b and the fluctuation icon 710 is “default” is executed.

  FIG. 29D shows an effect in which a change animation of type number 7 is being executed, a bomb 817 explodes, and covers the first to fourth areas of the variable icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 and the periphery thereof. 819 shows the state where it appears. FIG. 29D shows a state in which neither the fluctuation icon 710 nor the hold icon 713b can be visually recognized by the effect 819.

  FIG. 29E shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed and the effect 819 has changed to smoke 821. The state where neither the fluctuation icon 710 nor the hold icon 713b can be visually recognized due to the smoke 821 is continued. As in this example, even when only one hold icon is displayed, smoke 821 is displayed as a variable icon display area 711 and a hold icon display area 713 as in the case where four hold icons are displayed. A change animation is performed to cover the first to fourth regions and the periphery thereof. In addition, when the suspension increases during execution of the change animation in which the entire periphery of the fluctuation icon display region 711 and the suspension icon display region 713 is covered with the smoke 821, the suspension icon is displayed in the region covered with the smoke 821. May be.

  FIG. 29F shows a state in which a change animation of type number 7 is being executed, and smoke 821 has become slightly smaller toward the center of the smoke, and a part of the fluctuation icon 710 is visible. . Further, since the smoke 821 of the change animation has become slightly smaller, the icon change animation being executed displays a state in which it can be confirmed that the display mode of the change icon 710 is maintained at “default”.

  FIG. 29 (g) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 is further reduced toward the center of the smoke, and the entire variation icon 710 is visible. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the variation icon 710 is “default” continues.

  FIG. 29 (h) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 is further reduced toward the center of the smoke, and a part of the hold icon 713 b is visible. . Further, since the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced, the icon change animation being executed displays a state in which it is possible to barely confirm that the display mode of the hold icon 713b has changed to “blue”.

  FIG. 29 (i) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 7 is being executed, and smoke 821 has become smaller toward the center of the smoke, so that almost all of the hold icons 713b are visible. . Further, since the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced, the icon change animation being executed displays a state where it can be clearly confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713b has changed to “blue”.

  In FIG. 29 (j), the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 becomes smaller toward the center of the smoke, the transmittance of the smoke 821 increases, and the hold icon 713b is completely displayed. The state which became visible is shown. It is clearer that the display mode of the hold icon 713b has changed to “blue” in the icon change animation being executed because the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced and the transmittance of the smoke 821 is further increased. The status that can be confirmed is displayed.

  FIG. 29 (k) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 has become smaller toward the center of the smoke, and the transmittance of the smoke 821 has further increased. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 713b is “blue” and the display mode of the variation icon 710 is “default” continues.

  FIG. 29 (l) shows a state where the change animation of type number 7 ends. A state where the smoke 821 is completely extinguished is shown. In addition, a hold icon 713b whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the first area, indicating that the icon change animation has ended while the display mode of the variation icon 710 remains “default”.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.

(Example 4-3)
FIG. 30 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 7 according to Example 4-3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 30A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the special figure E (hidden probability change) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero. Further, an icon change animation is executed, and a pre-reading notice is given in which the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” to “blue”. Note that the display mode of the hold icons 713a, 713c, and 713d remains “default”.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a hit (hidden probability change) is Stop is displayed. On hold icon display area 713, hold icons 713a, 713b, 713c, and 713d are displayed, respectively. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 713c displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 30 (b), the first sub control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the “execution probability” in the change animation type table shown in FIG. 18, performs the execution probability lottery process, and executes the change animation of type number 7 in this example. Decide what to do. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 7 and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 7 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is 1 and the hold icon 713b in the first area having the first hold order is selected as the icon whose display mode is changed, and furthermore, the execution of the special figure 1 variable game is executed. The change animation of the classification number 7 is started at the timing when the operation is started. Further, in this example, it is also determined that the effect 819 for hiding the hold icons 713b to 713d is displayed at the time of starting the special figure 1 variable game. Special Figure 1 Change Animation Display Mode at the Start of Floating Game In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “blue” to “green” shown in FIG.

  FIG. 30B shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 7 is started. In the classification number 7, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode D is used. A state of being located near the upper part of 713d is displayed. Further, an icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 713b is “blue” and the display mode of the hold icons 713c and 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is executed. In the present embodiment, the change animation of the type number 7 is started at the timing when the execution of the special figure 1 variable game is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The change animation of type number 7 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation and the movement animation of the hold icon have ended.

  FIG. 30C illustrates a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. FIG. 30 (c) shows that the fourth LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on in accordance with the winning of a ball at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the change animation. It shows that the hold in FIG. 1 has increased from 3 to 4. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon 713c is displayed in the second area, the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area, and the fourth area. A hold icon 713e is displayed. Also, in FIG. 30C, the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, and further moves to the left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and flies near the upper middle part between the hold icons 713c and 713d. A bomb 817 is displayed. Further, an icon change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon 713b is “blue” and the display mode of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the variation icon 710 is “default”. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713e is displayed immediately (without animation) in the fourth area based on the increase in the hold, but this is not a limitation, and for example, the hold icon 713e has increased. A hold increase animation may be displayed. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713e is displayed in the display mode “default”. However, the display is not limited to this, and display may be started in a display mode other than “default”.

  FIG. 30D shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the bomb 817 has exploded, and the hold icons 713b to 713d and the effect 819 covering the periphery thereof have appeared. FIG. 30D shows a state where none of the hold icons 713b to 713d can be visually recognized by the effect 819, and the hold icon 713e and the fluctuation icon 710 show a state where they can be visually recognized. Since the display mode is selected according to the number of the hold icons displayed before the start of execution of the change animation, the change animation cannot correspond to the hold icons increased during the execution of the change animation. Therefore, in this example, the hold icon 713e is not covered with the effect 819. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 30E shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed and the effect 819 has changed to smoke 821. None of the hold icons 713b to 713d can be visually recognized by the smoke 821, and the hold icon 713e and the fluctuation icon 710 are continuously visible. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 30 (f) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, and smoke 821 has become slightly smaller toward the center of the smoke, and part of the hold icons 713b and 713d is barely visible. Show. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued. Moreover, since most of the hold icons 713b and 713d are covered with the smoke 821, the display mode cannot be clearly confirmed.

  FIG. 30 (g) shows that the change animation of type number 7 is being executed and the smoke 821 is further reduced toward the center of the smoke so that all the hold icons 713b and 713d are visible. Reference numeral 713c denotes a state where it is not yet visible. Further, since the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “blue” to “green” in the icon change animation being executed, and the display mode of the hold icon 713d is changed. A state where it can be clearly confirmed that it is “default” is displayed.

  FIG. 30H shows a state in which the change animation of the classification number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 is further reduced toward the center of the smoke, and the transmittance of the smoke 821 is also increasing. The hold icon 713c is covered with smoke 821, and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713d and 713e and the variation icon 710 is “default” and the display mode of the hold icon 713b is “green” continues.

  In FIG. 30 (i), the change animation of type number 7 is being executed, the smoke 821 becomes smaller toward the center of the smoke, and the transmittance of the smoke 821 further increases, so that the hold icon 713c increases. This shows a state where the portion is visible. In addition, since the smoke 821 of the change animation is further reduced and the transmittance of the smoke 821 is increased, the display mode of the hold icon 713c is maintained at “default” in the icon change animation being executed. The state that can be clearly confirmed is displayed.

  FIG. 30J shows a state where the change animation of type number 7 is finished. A state where the smoke 821 is completely extinguished is shown. In addition, a hold icon 713b whose display mode is “green” is displayed in the first area, indicating that the icon change animation is ended while the display modes of the hold icons 713c to 713e and the variation icon 710 remain “default”. .

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.
Further, in this embodiment, a change animation of type number 7 is displayed based on the prefetch result of the hold icon 713b in the second area having the second hold order in FIG. After reducing the visibility of the three hold icons 713b, 713c, and 713d in 30 (c), the visibility of the hold icons 713b and 713d is restored before the hold icon 713c, and then the visibility of the hold icon 713c is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a change animation is displayed based on the prefetch result of the hold corresponding to the hold icon 713b, the visibility of the hold icon 713b may be reduced to the end. Alternatively, the visibility of all held icons may be changed at the same time.
In addition, even if the hold increases after the display of the change animation starts, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is changed during the display of the change animation, The visibility of the hold icon may be reduced.
In the present embodiment, an example in which a change animation is displayed based on a specific hold prefetch result and the visibility of a hold icon corresponding to a hold other than a specific hold is reduced by the display of the change animation. Although shown, it is not restricted to this, For example, the display position of the hold icon corresponding to hold other than specific hold may be changed, or the display mode may be changed.

(Example 5)
FIG. 31 shows an example of the effect of the change animation of type number 8 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called start opening winning order variation game table that executes special figure varying games in the order in which game balls have won the special figure 1 starting opening 230 or the special figure 2 starting openings 232 and 233. In the game ball passage 231, the passing game balls are alternately distributed to the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the special figure 2 start opening 233 by the distribution mechanism. Since the game balls alternately enter the special figure 1 start port 230 and the special figure 2 start port 233, the hold icon corresponding to the game ball that has entered the special figure 1 start port 230 and the special figure 2 start port 233 are entered. As a general rule, the hold icon corresponding to the ball that has been played is alternately displayed in the hold icon display area 713. 31. The triangle containing the Arabic numeral “I” displayed in the variable icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 in FIG. 31 inward indicates the hold icon corresponding to the game ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. The inverted triangle including the Arabic numeral “II” inward indicates a hold icon corresponding to a game ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting ports 232 and 233. In the present embodiment, the change icon 710, the hold icon 713b, and the hold icon 713d are hold icons corresponding to the game balls that have entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and are images that imitate the hold icon 713a and the chance button 136 ( Hereinafter, the “chance button” is indicated.) 831 and the hold icon 713e are hold icons corresponding to the game balls that have entered the special figure 2 starting port 233. The hold icon display area 713 of the present embodiment can display a maximum of eight hold icons regardless of whether it is in power support or non-power support, from the left to the right, the first area, the second area, and the third area. The region is roughly divided into eight regions: a region, a fourth region, a fifth region, a sixth region, a seventh region, and an eighth region. Each of the first to eighth areas corresponds to the first to eighth holding ranks stored in the special figure type information storage area. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1 can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to eighth areas have a second to eighth hold 2. The hold icons corresponding to .about.8 can be displayed. In this embodiment, numerals 1 to 8 are displayed in the first to eighth areas of the hold icon display area 713, respectively, and the positions of the first to eighth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. The location of the first to eighth regions may be omitted.

  FIG. 31A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 display device 214 has the special figure 2 suspension game stop symbol. FIG. D (displacement) is displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first and second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is two, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is three.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 711, a variation icon 710 for the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. Further, an icon change animation is executed, and a pre-reading notice in which the display mode of the hold icon 713c (not shown) is changed to the chance button 831 is given in the third area.

  Prior to the execution of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 31 (a), the first sub control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 has received information from the main control unit 300 that the special figure 1 variable game is a variable game due to the start-up winning order fluctuation, without performing the type number execution lottery. Then, it is determined to execute the change animation of type number 8. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the type number 8 when the player who has viewed the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 displayed in the hold icon display area 713 presses the chance button 136. Decide to start the change animation. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 8, and determines which display order of the hold icon related to the hold of which hold order is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 8 is started. In this example, the number of icons whose display mode is changed is 2 and the hold icon 713b in the second area having the second hold order and the hold icon 713c in the third area having the third hold order change the display form. Furthermore, the change animation of type number 8 is started at the timing when the player depresses the chance button 136. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “red”, and the display mode of the hold icon 713c is changed from “default” to “blue”. I try to let them.

  FIG. 31B shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 and the execution of the change animation of type number 8 is started. In the classification number 8, as described with reference to FIG. 18, since the display mode E is used, the hold mode icon (see FIG. 31A) displayed in the third area and the display mode is the chance button 831 The state where the smoke 833 covering the periphery has appeared is shown. FIG. 31B illustrates a state in which the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 cannot be visually recognized by the smoke 833. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713a, 713b, 713d, 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” continues. In the present embodiment, the type number 8 is changed when the player who has viewed the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 presses the chance button 136. Although the animation is started (the execution timing of the change animation depends on the player's operation), the present invention is not limited to this.

  In FIG. 31 (c), a change animation of type number 8 is being executed, and smoke 833 slightly spreads left and right along the hold icon display area 713, and most of the hold icons 713b and 713d are not visible. Indicates the state. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713a and 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 31D, the change animation of type number 8 is being executed, the smoke 833 spreads further to the left and right along the hold icon display area 713, and the transmittance of the smoke 833 becomes low, and the hold icon 713b. And 713d are in a state where they are completely invisible. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713a and 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 31 (e) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 8 is being executed and the transmittance of smoke 833 is slightly increased. FIG. 31E shows a state in which the hold icons 713b and 713d and the hold icon of the chance button 831 are hardly visible, although the transmittance of the smoke 833 is slightly increased. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713a and 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 31F, the change animation of type number 8 is being executed, the smoke 833 transmittance is further increased, and the hold icons 713b and 713d and the hold icon 713c whose display mode has changed from the chance button 831 are barely visible. It shows a possible state. The display mode of the hold icons 713b, 713c, and 713d cannot be confirmed. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713a and 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 31G shows a state in which a change animation of type number 8 is being executed, the smoke 833 transmittance is further increased, and the hold icons 713b, 713c, and 713d are visible. The display mode of the hold icons 713b, 713c, and 713d cannot be confirmed. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713a and 713e and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 31 (h) shows a state where the change animation of type number 8 ends. A state in which the smoke 833 has completely disappeared is shown. In addition, the hold icon 713b whose display mode is “red” is displayed in the second area, the hold icon 713c whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the third area, and the hold icons 713a, 713d, 713e and the change icon are displayed. It shows that the icon change animation is ended while the display mode 710 remains “default”.

As shown in this example, the visibility is lowered or increased by the change animation started when the chance button 136 is pressed. The display mode displayed in the third area is the hold icon of the chance button 831. It is not limited, and the visibility of icons around the hold icon may be reduced or increased.
In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to an image simulating the chance button 136, execution of the change animation other than the type number 8 may be restricted.

Further, as shown in this example, not only the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 shown in the third area, but also the periphery of the third area such as the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area, for example. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the screen may be changed.
Further, while the hold icon of the chance button 831 is displayed, the pressing of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted. For example, the display of the change animation does not have to be started even when the player presses the chance button 136 for a predetermined time before the stop of the change or a predetermined time after the start of the change.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a change animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by having a common change animation as a change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon of different types, the execution frequency of the change animation can be increased. May be possible. When considering a hold icon as a reference, adding a variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the frequency of execution of the change animation can be increased, and when the change animation is executed, one change is made. In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.

(Example 6)
FIG. 32 shows, in time series, an example in which the execution trigger of the change animation of type number 1 and the change animation of type number 8 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment overlaps. FIG. 32A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the special figure G (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 5—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct has been lost. Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. A hold icon 713a is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713, a hold icon 713b is displayed in the second area, an icon change animation is executed in the third area, and a hold icon 713c (not shown) is displayed. Is displayed in the fourth area, and a hold icon 713d is displayed in the fourth area. In the fluctuation icon display area 711, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this embodiment, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is started, a predetermined animation (in this embodiment, a movement animation between the hold / change icons, in the change icon display area 711 and the hold icon display area 713 of the decorative symbol display device 208, is displayed. Hold icon movement animation) is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 713a displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 713 becomes the change icon 710, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 711. Moving. In this embodiment, the hold icon 713a changes to a change icon 710 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 713b displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 713 gradually moves to the first area and the display mode displayed in the third area is the chance button 831. The hold icon gradually moves to the second area, and the hold icon 713d displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 32 (b), the first sub control unit 400 has received the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, so the first sub control unit effect shown in FIG. In step S801 of the control process, it is determined that the prefetching notice execution condition is satisfied, and the process of step S803 is executed. In the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 stores “Special Figure G” (out of line) as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 4” of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. In this example, it is determined to execute the change animation of type number 1. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 1, and also determines which holding order the display mode of the hold icon related to the hold is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 1 is started. In this example, the number of icons for changing the display mode during the change animation of type number 1 is 1, and the hold icon 713b in the first area having the first hold order is selected as the icon for changing the display mode. Furthermore, the change animation of type number 1 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the move animation of the hold icon have ended. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713b is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “blue”.

  Further, in the process of step S803, the first sub-control unit 400 additionally executes a change animation of the type number 8 based on the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 being displayed in the hold icon display area 713. Decide that. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of icons whose display mode is changed during the change animation of the classification number 8, and determines which display order of the hold icon related to the hold of which hold order is changed. Furthermore, it is determined at which timing the change animation of type number 8 is started. In this example, the number of icons for changing the display mode during the change animation of the classification number 8 is 1, and the hold icon 713c in the second area having the second hold order is selected as the icon for changing the display mode. Further, the change animation of type number 8 is started at the timing when the player presses the chance button 136. In step S803, an icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is also set. The icon change animation is an independent animation separate from the change animation defined in the table of FIG. In the icon change animation of this example, the display mode of the hold icon 713c is changed from “default” shown in FIG. 17 to “blue”.

  FIG. 32C shows a state after the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the movement animation of the hold icon is finished. The fluctuation icon 710 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 711, the hold icon 713b is displayed in the first area, the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 is displayed in the second area, and the hold icon 713d is displayed in the third area. Has been. Note that the hold icon is not displayed in the fourth area.

  FIG. 32D shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 and the execution of the change animation of type number 8 is started. Further, FIG. 32D shows a state in which execution of the change animation of type number 1 is started. In the classification number 1, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode A-1 is used. Yes. In the present embodiment, the change animation of type number 1 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change animation of type number 1 may be started when the icon is moved in association with the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the move animation of the hold icon. In this embodiment, since the player presses the chance button 136 before the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon and the movement animation of the hold icon ends, the execution of the change animation of the type number 1 is started. Before that, execution of the change animation of type number 8 is started. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the display mode E is used for the classification number 8, and therefore the hold icon (see FIG. 32C) that is displayed in the second area and whose display mode is the chance button 831. ) And its surrounding smoke 833 has appeared. FIG. 32D shows a state in which the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 cannot be visually recognized by the smoke 833. In the present embodiment, the player who has viewed the hold icon whose display mode is the chance button 831 displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 presses the chance button 136, and receives the type number 8 as an opportunity. Although the change animation is started (the execution trigger of the change animation depends on the player's operation), it is not limited to this.

  FIG. 32 (e) shows that the change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 is holding the sword and proceeds to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, while the second icon in the hold icon display area 713 is displayed. The hold icon 713d displayed in the three areas is cut off. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the variation icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 32 (e) shows that the change animation of type number 8 is also being executed, and the smoke 833 slightly spreads to the left and right along the hold icon display area 713, and a part of the hold icons 713b and 713d cannot be visually recognized. Show.

  FIG. 32 (f) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 1 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 is further advanced to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with a sword. In FIG. 32 (f), the change animation of type number 8 is also being executed. Smoke 833 further spreads left and right along the hold icon display area 713, and most of Yoshimune 801 and hold icons 713b and 713d. This shows the state where all of can not be seen. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the variation icon 710 is “default” continues. As shown in this example, the change animation of one type number 8 may have an effect that the visibility of the change animation of the other type number 1 is lowered.

  In FIG. 32G, the change animation of type number 8 is being executed, the smoke 833 transmittance is slightly higher, and the hold icons 713b and 713d and the hold icon 713c whose display mode has changed from the chance button 831 can be visually recognized. Indicates the state. Since the transmittance of the smoke 833 is slightly increased, the icon change animation being executed displays a state in which it can be confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon 713c has changed from “default” to “blue”. The icon change animation of the hold icon 713c ends when the display mode of the hold icon 713c changes from “default” to “blue”.

  FIG. 32 (g) also shows that the change animation of type number 1 is also being executed. A state in which the fluctuation icon 710 displayed in 711 is cut off is shown. Further, icon change animations of the hold icons 713b and 713d are also being executed, and the hold icons 713b and 713d are shown to have a straight line cut in a substantially horizontal direction. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  In FIG. 32 (h), a change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 who has finished holding the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 is on the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where the sword is held and stopped. Further, icon change animations of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 are also being executed, and the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 are shown in a state of being cut in a straight line in a substantially horizontal direction. Further, the icon change animation in which the display mode of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 is “default” is continued.

  FIG. 32 (h) shows that the change animation of type number 8 is being executed, the smoke 833 transmittance is further increased, and the hold icons 713b and 713d and the hold icon 713c whose display mode has changed from the chance button 831 are displayed. This shows a state in which the visibility is further increased.

  FIG. 32 (i) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 1 is being executed and Yoshimune 801 turned to the right from the lower left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, icon change animations of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 are also being executed, and all the icons of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 having a cut are shifted to the right at the break. Indicates the state. Here, at the start of the change animation of type number 1, execution of the change animation of type number 8 has started (see FIG. 32 (d)), and the icon change animation of the hold icon 713c has already ended. (See FIG. 32 (g)), the display mode of the hold icon 713c does not change.

  FIG. 32 (i) shows a state where the change animation of type number 8 ends. A state in which the smoke 833 has completely disappeared is shown.

  FIG. 32 (j) shows a state in which a change animation of type number 1 is being executed, and Yoshimune 801 with the sword in the sheath is facing the front and smiling well. In addition, icon change animations of the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 are also being executed, the hold icon 713b whose display mode is “default” is broken into two, and the entire hold icon 713b whose display mode is “blue”. It shows the state where can be seen. In addition, the hold icon 713d and the change icon 710 are displayed in a state where the icons are returned to the “default” display mode with the original break without breaking into two.

  FIG. 32 (k) shows a state in which the change animation of type number 1 ends. The figure shows a state in which Yoshimune 801 smiles satisfactorily and turns to the lower left hand side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 32 (k), the hold icon 713b whose display mode is “blue” is displayed in the first area, the break between the hold icon 713d and the change icon 710 disappears, and the hold icons 713b and 713d and the change icon 710 Indicates that the icon change animation has ended.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 32 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a plurality of icons (for example, a plurality of hold icons 713a, 713b, etc. and a variation icon 710);
Second display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure display which can display at least a symbol fluctuation display (for example, special figure fluctuation display which repeats all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment)). 2 display device 214),
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of animations (for example, change animations of type numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 18),
At least one of the plurality of animations is a first animation (for example, a change animation of type number 1 shown in FIG. 19 and the number of icons whose display mode changes is 1),
At least one of the plurality of animations is a second animation (for example, a change animation of type number 1 shown in FIG. 20 and the number of icons whose display mode changes is 2),
When the first animation is displayed, the first display means can change at least one display mode of the plurality of icons (for example, the hold icon 713c shown in FIG. 19 is changed from “default”). Display means) (changed to “blue”)
When the second animation is displayed, the first display means can at least change the display mode of at least one of the plurality of icons (for example, the hold icon 713b shown in FIG. The display is changed to “green” and the hold icon 713d is changed from “default” to “blue”),
When the first animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed (for example, the hold icon 713c shown in FIG. 19) is the first number (for example, 1),
When the second animation is displayed, the number of the icons (for example, the hold icons 713b and 713d shown in FIG. 20) whose display mode is changed is a second number (for example, 2),
The display modes (for example, FIGS. 19A to 19I) of at least a part of the first animation are the display modes (for example, FIGS. 20A to 20I of the second animation). )) And at least the same display mode,
The first number is at least different from the second number;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, even in the same appearance animation, the number of icons for changing the display mode is changed, so that it can be displayed in various modes, and the player's interests can be enhanced. Can be improved. Moreover, it is possible to give expectation to all displayed holds without causing the player to pay attention to the specific hold at the time when the animation display is started. In addition, since the display mode of a plurality of icons can be changed from 0 by executing one animation, there is a case where it is not necessary to have an animation for each number of icons whose display mode is changed, and the design can be facilitated. is there.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The second number is a number of at least 2 or more,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even if the animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that there is not.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying the number of operation holding balls that will operate the second display means according to the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a variable icon,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the fluctuation icon as a notice of the symbol fluctuation display displayed on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration,
Since the animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon, the animation is executed by having a common animation as an animation that changes the display mode of the variable icon and the hold icon that are different in type. In some cases, the frequency can be increased. Considering the hold icon as a reference, adding the variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the animation execution frequency may be increased, and when the animation is executed, In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the first animation over a first time (for example, 5000 msec),
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the second animation over a second time (for example, 5000 msec),
The length of the first time is the same length as the length of the second time.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the scales of the plurality of animations are the same. By keeping the same scale for a plurality of animations, it is not necessary to consider the influence on other displays, effects, etc. due to the difference in the scale, so that the design may be facilitated.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
All of the display modes of the first animation are the same display modes as all of the display modes of the second animation.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the display modes of the plurality of animations are exactly the same. Despite the fact that the same animation is being executed, the number of icons whose display mode changes may be different, so that the number of icons that will change the display mode to the player at the time of execution of the animation is reduced. There are cases where it is not possible to be surely specified.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
The first number is a number including at least zero;
It is characterized by that.

(8) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the first animation when one or more icons are displayed;
The second display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second animation when two or more of the icons are displayed.
It is characterized by that.

(9) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the animation is reproduced on the pachinko machine.

(10) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a plurality of icons (for example, a plurality of hold icons 713a, 713b, etc. and a variation icon 710);
Second display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure display which can display at least a symbol fluctuation display (for example, special figure fluctuation display which repeats all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment)). 2 display device 214),
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of animations (for example, change animations of type numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 18),
At least one of the plurality of animations is a first animation (for example, a change animation of type number 5 shown in FIG. 27 and 爺 813 appears),
At least one of the plurality of animations is a second animation (for example, a change animation of type number 5 shown in FIG. 25 and Yoshimune 801 appears),
When the first animation is displayed, the first display means can change at least one display mode of the plurality of icons (for example, the hold icon 713b shown in FIG. 27 is changed from “default”). Display means) (changed to “blue”)
The first display means can change at least the display mode of at least one of the plurality of icons when the second animation is displayed (the hold icon 713b shown in FIG. 25 changes from “default” to “blue”). And the hold icon 713d is changed from “default” to “green”),
When the first animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed (for example, the hold icon 713b shown in FIG. 27) is the first number (for example, 1),
When the second animation is displayed, the number of the icons (for example, the hold icons b and 713d shown in FIG. 25) whose display mode is changed is a second number (for example, 2),
The display mode of at least a part of the first animation (for example, 爺 813 in FIGS. 27D to 27I) is the display mode of at least a part of the second animation (for example, FIG. 25D). ~ (I) Yoshimune 801) and at least a different display mode,
The first number is at least different from the second number;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, dedicated animation is performed for each number of icons whose display mode is changed, so that display can be performed in various modes, and the player's interest can be improved. There is a case. In addition, by changing the display mode of the animation every time the display mode of the icons is changed, the number of icons that may change due to the display of the animation is specified when the display of the animation is started. It becomes possible. As a result, the number of icons that the player should pay attention to is specified, and the player's expectation may not be wasted.

(11) The pachinko machine 100,
The second number is a number of at least 2 or more,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even if the animation is displayed in order to change the display mode of one icon, the display mode of a plurality of icons may be changed by the player. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that there is not.

(12) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying the number of operation holding balls that will operate the second display means according to the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

(13) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a variable icon,
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least the change icon as a notice of the symbol change display being displayed on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon. By having a common animation, there are cases where the execution frequency of the animation can be increased. Considering the hold icon as a reference, adding the variable icon increases the number of icons displayed, so the animation execution frequency may be increased, and when the animation is executed, In some cases, the maximum number of icons whose display mode can be changed by animation can be increased.

(14) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the first animation over a first time (for example, 3500 msec),
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the second animation over a second time (for example, 3500 msec),
The length of the first time is the same length as the length of the second time.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the scales of the plurality of animations are the same. By keeping the same scale for a plurality of animations, it is not necessary to consider the influence on other displays, effects, etc. due to the difference in the scale, so that the design may be facilitated.

(15) The pachinko machine 100,
All of the display modes of the first animation (for example, the change animation of type number 4 shown in FIG. 23) are all the display modes of the second animation (for example, the change animation of type number 5 shown in FIG. 25). Is a different display mode,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the display modes of the plurality of animations are all different. Since a completely different animation is being executed, by specifying the number of icons whose display mode changes, the player can be sure to specify the number of icons whose display mode will change at the time of execution of the animation. May be possible.

(16) The pachinko machine 100,
The first number is a number including at least zero;
It is characterized by that.

(17) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the first animation when one or more icons are displayed;
The second display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second animation when two or more of the icons are displayed.
It is characterized by that.

(18) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the animation is reproduced on the pachinko machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, when the number of icons whose display mode has changed is smaller, the icon display mode after the change may be more likely to have a higher promotion reliability.
Further, the execution frequency of the change animation executed when the number of icon changes is large may be lower than the execution frequency of the change animation executed when the number of icon changes is small.
Moreover, although the number of icons whose display mode changes is the same, another change animation with a different display mode may be performed.
Even if the change animation is displayed, the icon display mode may not change (so-called failure pattern).

In addition, before the change animation is executed, it may be possible to specify the hold targeted by the change animation. For example, the hold lamp may blink at the winning stage, and the change animation may be performed for the blinking hold.
Further, depending on the positional relationship of the hold icon to be changed, it may not be possible to simultaneously change during execution of one change animation.
In addition, when a change animation is performed at the start of a special figure variable game, the hold icon related to the fourth hold cannot be a target whose display mode is changed. However, the display mode of the hold icon related to the fourth hold may be changed as long as it is another trigger such as the end of the special figure variable game.

The change animation may be executed only in the first gaming state and not executed in the second gaming state. For example, the first gaming state may be a non-electric support state and the second gaming state may be an electric support state.
Further, the change animation may change only the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon corresponding to one of a plurality of special figures (for example, special figure 1 and special figure 2), and hold the other special figure. You may make it not change the display mode of an icon or a fluctuation icon.
Moreover, the specific display mode in the icon may be displayed only after the specific change animation is executed. That is, the icon may not be displayed in a specific display mode without executing a specific change animation.
In addition, the change animation may change the display mode of one or a plurality of held icons, and may not change the display mode of the fluctuation icon.

Further, there may be a case where one of the change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change animation for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon hide at least a part of the other.
An icon whose display mode does not change may be hidden by the change animation. In order to show that it is not a change target, an icon that is not a change target of the display mode may be displayed with priority over the change animation. That is, at least a part of the change animation may be hidden by an icon that is not a change target.
In addition, in the plurality of change animations, the display mode of the start and end of the animation may be the same. Moreover, the display mode of the animation in the period between them may differ. Further, the scales in a plurality of animations may be the same.
The second change animation may include the first change animation.
Further, the variation animation may be executed only when a specific variation time is selected.
The change animation for changing the display mode of a plurality of icons changes only a plurality of icons corresponding to one special drawing, and does not change the display mode of the icon corresponding to the other special drawing. May be.
Moreover, the change animation which changes the display mode of a some icon may change the display mode of both the icon corresponding to a 1st special drawing, and the icon corresponding to a 2nd special drawing.
In addition, the change animation for changing the display mode of the plurality of icons may be performed only when there is a certain number of suspensions.

In addition, when an icon is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the display mode can be changed yet and a modest reliability level is high), an icon change animation that changes the display mode of a plurality of icons is displayed. You may make it raise the execution frequency of the change animation performed. For example, the change animation may be executed with every change until the icon is deleted. By doing so, there is a case where promotion of the display mode of the hold icon can be made.
Further, when the icon is displayed in a specific display mode, the execution frequency of the change animation executed during the icon change animation that changes the display mode of the plurality of icons may be reduced. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the player from feeling too much expectation.
Further, the change animation executed when the display mode of the plurality of icons is changed may return (degrade) the plurality of icons to the “default” display mode. For example, after changing the display mode of a plurality of hold icons that are not subject to the pre-reading notice, the change animation may be executed after the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-reading notice target icon is performed. .
Further, in a plurality of change animations, at least the character, the effect, or the scale may be the same.

Further, the number of types of change animations that change the display mode of the hold icon may be smaller than the types of change animations that change the display mode of the hold icon.
Further, there is only one type of change animation executed when the number of changes to the display mode of the hold icon is large, and the type of change animation executed when the number of change of the display mode of the hold icon is small. There may be a plurality.
In addition, the number of icons whose display mode may change may be clearly indicated. In the change animation, the number of icons whose display mode may be changed may be indicated by a number.

Further, there may be a case where a change animation for a plurality of icons is performed a plurality of times before a symbol variation display corresponding to the variation icon is started for one variation icon. Further, although the target icon is different for each change animation, the above-described variation icon may be a display target change target in both the change animations. For example, in the first change animation, the icon A and the icon B may be the display mode change targets, and in the second change animation, the icon B and the icon C may be the display mode change targets.
In addition, the execution probability of the change animation executed when the number of objects whose icons are changed is larger than the execution probability of the change animation executed when the number of objects whose icons are changed is small. It may be a low probability.
Moreover, while the icon is displayed in a specific display mode, the execution probability of the change animation may be lowered. In this case, the execution probability may include zero.
Moreover, when the display mode of a some icon is changed by one change animation, you may make it the standby animation performed by each of the said some icon synchronize. For example, the display modes of the plurality of icons may be the same, and when the display modes are different, it is only necessary that the start timing of the standby animation is synchronized.

Moreover, when the display mode of a plurality of icons is changed by one change animation, the display mode of the plurality of icons may be different from one another. Conversely, the display mode may be the same.
Moreover, the display modes of a plurality of icons that are the target of one change animation may be different from each other, and the same display mode may be used after execution of the change animation.
In addition, a plurality of icon change animations with a small number of icons whose display modes are to be changed may be simultaneously performed, so that the display modes of the plurality of icons may change as a result.
The change animation can specify an icon whose display mode may change when the change animation display is started, and an icon whose display mode may be changed when the animation display starts. There may be things that cannot be identified.
In addition, the execution periods of a plurality of change animations may overlap. If the execution animations overlap and the change animations overlap, the display is performed according to a predetermined display priority order so that the other change animation is displayed with priority over the other change animation. Alternatively, the display of one or both of the change animations may be stopped or shortened.
Further, there may be a case where part or all of the animation is not displayed. For example, when a change animation or an icon change animation is displayed, if a darkening effect or the like is executed, the change animation or the icon change animation may not be displayed because the screen is in a dark state. Also, depending on the timing, the player can view the change animation and the icon change animation for a predetermined period from the start of the display, and the pattern that becomes invisible in the middle, the start of the change animation and the icon change animation is not visible, Animation may be displayed from the middle. Furthermore, the start and end of the animation may not be visible and may be visible only in the middle.

When a change animation is being displayed or while waiting for a change animation to be displayed (a state in which the display of the change animation has already been decided but has not yet started), the start of the display of a new change animation is restricted. May be.
Further, based on the start of the change animation, the change animation being displayed may be canceled and the display may jump to the display when the display of the change animation is completed.
In addition, each change animation is displayed based on a display priority order determined in advance, and the display of the other change animation may be hidden by one change animation, or the change animation that has been newly started is displayed first. The displayed change animation may be hidden. The reverse is also possible.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. The enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 33, “a plurality of reels 1002 provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and driven to rotate, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels”. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 displays a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 34 (a). “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
A first display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of icons;
A second display means capable of displaying at least the symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of animations,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a first animation,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a second animation,
The first display means is a display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the first animation is displayed;
The first display means is display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the second animation is displayed;
When the first animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the first number,
When the second animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the second number,
The display mode of at least a part of the first animation is at least the same display mode as the display mode of at least a part of the second animation,
The first number is at least different from the second number;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The second number is a number of at least 2 or more,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying the number of operation holding balls that will operate the second display means according to the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a variable icon,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the fluctuation icon as a notice of the symbol fluctuation display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the first animation over a first time,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the second animation over a second time,
The length of the first time is the same length as the length of the second time.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
All of the display modes of the first animation are the same display modes as all of the display modes of the second animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The first number is a number including at least zero;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
The first display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the first animation when one or more icons are displayed;
The second display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second animation when two or more of the icons are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 10)
A first display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of icons;
A second display means capable of displaying at least the symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of animations,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a first animation,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a second animation,
The first display means is a display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the first animation is displayed;
The first display means is display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the second animation is displayed;
When the first animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the first number,
When the second animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the second number,
The display mode of at least a part of the first animation is a display mode that is at least different from the display mode of at least a part of the second animation,
The first number is at least different from the second number;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to appendix 10, wherein
The second number is a number of at least 2 or more,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 12)
The game table according to appendix 10 or 11,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying the number of operation holding balls that will operate the second display means according to the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 10 to 12,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a variable icon,
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least the change icon as a notice of the symbol change display being displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 10 to 13,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the first animation over a first time,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the second animation over a second time,
The length of the first time is the same length as the length of the second time.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 10 to 14,
All of the display modes of the first animation are display modes different from all of the display modes of the second animation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 10 to 15,
The first number is a number including at least zero;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 10 to 16,
The first display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the first animation when one or more icons are displayed;
The second display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second animation when two or more of the icons are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 10 to 17,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative symbol display device 224 Production movable body 226 General prize opening 228, 229 General figure starting port 230 Special figure 1 starting port 231 Game ball passage 232, 233 Special figure 2 starting port 232a Blade members 234, 235 Variable winning opening 234a Door member 711 Fluctuation icon display area 713 Hold icon display area 713a, 713b, 713c, 713d, 713e Hold icon 801 Yoshimune 803, 807, 809, 811, 815, 819 Effect 805, 806 Thousand boxes 813 爺 817 Bomb 821 smoke

Claims (9)

A first display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of icons;
A second display means capable of displaying at least the symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of animations,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a first animation,
At least one of the plurality of animations is a second animation,
The first display means is a display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the first animation is displayed;
The first display means is display means capable of changing at least one display mode of the plurality of icons when the second animation is displayed;
When the first animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the first number,
When the second animation is displayed, the number of the icons whose display mode is changed is the second number,
The display mode of at least a part of the first animation is a display mode that is at least different from the display mode of at least a part of the second animation,
The first number is at least different from the second number;
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The second number is a number of at least 2 or more,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
The first display means is a display means capable of displaying the number of operation holding balls that will operate the second display means according to the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
At least one of the plurality of icons is a variable icon,
The first display means is display means capable of displaying at least the change icon as a notice of the symbol change display being displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the first animation over a first time,
The first display means is a display means for displaying at least the second animation over a second time,
The length of the first time is the same length as the length of the second time.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
All of the display modes of the first animation are display modes different from all of the display modes of the second animation.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The first number is a number including at least zero;
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The first display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the first animation when one or more icons are displayed;
The second display means is display means capable of starting display of at least the second animation when two or more of the icons are displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images